Operating Instruction NMS

BA01459G/00/EN/05.
20 Products Solutions Services

71486422
2020-08-05
Valid as of version
01.03.zz (Device firmware)
Operating Instructions
Proservo NMS81
Tank Gauging
Proservo NMS81
Order code: XXXXX-XXXXXX

1. Ser. no.: XXXXXXXXXXXX
Ext. ord. cd.: XXX.XXXX.XX
Serial number
2. www.endress.com/deviceviewer Endress+Hauser
Operations App
3.
A0023555
2 Endress+Hauser
Proservo NMS81 Table of contents
Table of contents
1 About this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 9 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

1.1 Document function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 9.1 Terms related to tank measurement . . . . . . . . 84
1.2 Document conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 9.2 Initial settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
1.3 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 9.3 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
1.4 Registered trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 9.4 Configuring the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . 94
9.5 Configuring the tank gauging application . . . 107
2 Basic safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 9.6 Advanced settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
9.7 Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
2.1 Requirements for the personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 9.8 Protecting settings from unauthorized
2.2 Designated use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
2.3 Workplace safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.4 Operational safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.5 Product safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 10 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
10.1 Reading off the device locking status . . . . . . 127
3 Product description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 10.2 Reading off measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
10.3 Gauge commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
3.1 Product design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
11 Diagnostics and troubleshooting . . 134

4 Incoming acceptance and product
11.1 General trouble shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 11.2 Diagnostic information on local display . . . . . 136
4.1 Incoming acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 11.3 Diagnostic information in FieldCare . . . . . . . 139
4.2 Product identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 11.4 Overview of the diagnostic messages . . . . . . 141
4.3 Storage and transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 11.5 Diagnostic list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
11.6 Reset measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
11.7 Device information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
5 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
11.8 Firmware history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
5.1 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
5.2 Mounting of the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
5.3 Post-installation check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 12 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
12.1 Maintenance tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
12.2 Endress+Hauser services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
6 Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
6.1 Terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
6.2 Connecting requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 13 Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
6.3 Ensuring the degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . 65 13.1 General information on repairs . . . . . . . . . . . 149
6.4 Post-connection check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 13.2 Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
13.3 Endress+Hauser services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
13.4 Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
7 Operability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
13.5 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
7.1 Overview of the operation options . . . . . . . . . 66
7.2 Structure and function of the operating
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 14 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
7.3 Access to the operating menu via the local or 14.1 Device-specific accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
remote display and operating module . . . . . . . 68 14.2 Communication-specific accessories . . . . . . . 154
7.4 Access to the operating menu via the service 14.3 Service-specific accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
interface and FieldCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 14.4 System components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
7.5 Access to the operating menu via Tankvision
Tank Scanner NXA820 and FieldCare . . . . . . . 80 15 Operating menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
15.1 Overview of the operating menu . . . . . . . . . . 156
8 System integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 15.2 "Operation" menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
8.1 Overview of the Device Description files 15.3 "Setup" menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
(DTM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 15.4 "Diagnostics" menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Endress+Hauser 3
About this document Proservo NMS81
1 About this document
1.1 Document function

These Operating Instructions contain all the information that is required in various phases
of the life cycle of the device: from product identification, incoming acceptance and
storage, to mounting, connection, operation and commissioning through to
troubleshooting, maintenance and disposal.
1.2 Document conventions
1.2.1 Safety symbols

DANGER
This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation will result in
serious or fatal injury.
WARNING
This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation can result in
serious or fatal injury.
CAUTION
This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation can result in
minor or medium injury.
NOTICE
This symbol contains information on procedures and other facts which do not result in
personal injury.
1.2.2 Electrical symbols
Alternating current
Direct current and alternating current
Direct current
Ground connection
A grounded terminal which, as far as the operator is concerned, is grounded via a
grounding system.
Protective earth (PE)
Ground terminals that must be connected to ground prior to establishing any other
connections.
The ground terminals are located on the interior and exterior of the device:
• Interior ground terminal: protective earth is connected to the mains supply.
• Exterior ground terminal: device is connected to the plant grounding system.
1.2.3 Tool symbols
Phillips head screwdriver
4 Endress+Hauser
Proservo NMS81 About this document
Flat blade screwdriver
Torx screwdriver
Allen key
Open-ended wrench
1.2.4 Symbols for certain types of information and graphics
Permitted
Procedures, processes or actions that are permitted
Preferred
Procedures, processes or actions that are preferred
Forbidden
Procedures, processes or actions that are forbidden
Tip
Indicates additional information
Reference to documentation
Reference to graphic
Notice or individual step to be observed

1. , 2. , 3.
Series of steps
Result of a step
Operation via operating tool
Write-protected parameter
1, 2, 3, ...
Item numbers
A, B, C, ...
Views
Safety instructions
Observe the safety instructions contained in the associated Operating Instructions
Endress+Hauser 5
About this document Proservo NMS81
1.3 Documentation
The following documentation types are available in the Downloads area of the Endress
+Hauser website (www.endress.com/downloads):
For an overview of the scope of the associated Technical Documentation, refer to the
following:
• W@M Device Viewer (www.endress.com/deviceviewer): Enter the serial number
from nameplate
• Endress+Hauser Operations App: Enter the serial number from the nameplate or
scan the 2D matrix code (QR code) on the nameplate
1.3.1 Technical Information (TI)

Planning aid
The document contains all the technical data on the device and provides an overview of
the accessories and other products that can be ordered for the device.
1.3.2 Brief Operating Instructions (KA)

Guide that takes you quickly to the 1st measured value
The Brief Operating Instructions contain all the essential information from incoming
acceptance to initial commissioning.
1.3.3 Operating Instructions (BA)

The Operating Instructions contain all the information that is required in various phases of
the life cycle of the device: from product identification, incoming acceptance and storage,
to mounting, connection, operation and commissioning through to troubleshooting,
maintenance and disposal.
It also contains a detailed explanation of each individual parameter in the operating menu
(except the Expert menu). The description is aimed at those who work with the device
over the entire life cycle and perform specific configurations.
1.3.4 Description of Device Parameters (GP)

The Description of Device Parameters provides a detailed explanation of each individual
parameter in the 2nd part of the operating menu: the Expert menu. It contains all the
device parameters and allows direct access to the parameters by entering a specific code.
The description is aimed at those who work with the device over the entire life cycle and
perform specific configurations.
1.3.5 Safety Instructions (XA)

Depending on the approval, the following Safety Instructions (XA) are supplied with the
device. They are an integral part of the Operating Instructions.
The nameplate indicates the Safety Instructions (XA) that are relevant to the device.
1.3.6 Installation instructions (EA)

Installation Instruction are used to replace a faulty unit with a functioning unit of the same
type.
6 Endress+Hauser
Proservo NMS81 About this document
1.4 Registered trademarks

FieldCare®
Registered trademark of the Endress+Hauser Process Solutions AG, Reinach, Switzerland
MODBUS®
Registered trademark of the MODBUS-IDA, Hopkinton, MA, USA
Endress+Hauser 7
Basic safety instructions Proservo NMS81
2 Basic safety instructions
2.1 Requirements for the personnel

The personnel for installation, commissioning, diagnostics and maintenance must fulfill
the following requirements:
‣ Trained, qualified specialists must have a relevant qualification for this specific function
and task.
‣ Are authorized by the plant owner/operator.
‣ Are familiar with federal/national regulations.
‣ Before starting work, read and understand the instructions in the manual and
supplementary documentation as well as the certificates (depending on the
application).
‣ Follow instructions and comply with basic conditions.
The operating personnel must fulfill the following requirements:
‣ Are instructed and authorized according to the requirements of the task by the facility's
owner-operator.
‣ Follow the instructions in this manual.
2.2 Designated use

Application and measured materials
Depending on the version ordered, the measuring device can also measure potentially
explosive, flammable, poisonous and oxidizing media.
Measuring devices for use in hazardous areas, in hygienic applications or in applications
where there is an increased risk due to process pressure, are labeled accordingly on the
nameplate.
To ensure that the measuring device remains in proper condition for the operation time:
‣ Only use the measuring device in full compliance with the data on the nameplate and
the general conditions listed in the Operating Instructions and supplementary
documentation.
‣ Check the nameplate to verify if the device ordered can be put to its intended use in the
approval-related area (e.g. explosion protection, pressure vessel safety).
‣ Use the measuring device only for media against which the process-wetted materials
are adequately resistant.
‣ If the measuring device is not operated at atmospheric temperature, compliance with
the relevant basic conditions specified in the associated device documentation is
absolutely essential.
‣ Protect the measuring device permanently against corrosion from environmental
influences.
‣ Observe the limit values in the "Technical Information".
The manufacturer is not liable for damage caused by improper or non-designated use.
Residual risk
During operation the sensor may assume a temperature near the temperature of the
measured material.
Danger of burns due to heated surfaces!
‣ For high process temperatures: Install protection against contact in order to prevent
burns.
8 Endress+Hauser
Proservo NMS81 Basic safety instructions
2.3 Workplace safety

For work on and with the device:
‣ Wear the required personal protective equipment according to federal/national
regulations.
2.4 Operational safety

Risk of injury.
‣ Operate the device in proper technical condition and fail-safe condition only.
‣ The operator is responsible for interference-free operation of the device.
Conversions to the device
Unauthorized modifications to the device are not permitted and can lead to unforeseeable
dangers.
‣ If, despite this, modifications are required, consult with the manufacturer.
Repair
To ensure continued operational safety and reliability,
‣ Carry out repairs on the device only if they are expressly permitted.
‣ Observe federal/national regulations pertaining to repair of an electrical device.
‣ Use original spare parts and accessories from the manufacturer only.
Hazardous area
To eliminate a danger for persons or for the facility when the device is used in the
hazardous area (e.g. explosion protection, pressure vessel safety):
‣ Based on the nameplate, check whether the ordered device is permitted for the
intended use in the hazardous area.
‣ Observe the specifications in the separate supplementary documentation that is an
integral part of these Instructions.
2.5 Product safety

This measuring device is designed in accordance with good engineering practice to meet
state-of-the-art safety requirements, has been tested, and left the factory in a condition in
which it is safe to operate. It meets general safety standards and legal requirements.
NOTICE
Loss of degree of protection by opening of the device in humid environments
‣ If the device is opened in a humid environment, the degree of protection indicated on
the nameplate is no longer valid. This may also impair the safe operation of the device.
2.5.1 CE mark
The measuring system meets the legal requirements of the applicable EC guidelines. These
are listed in the corresponding EC Declaration of Conformity together with the standards
applied.
Endress+Hauser confirms successful testing of the device by affixing to it the CE mark.
Endress+Hauser 9
Product description Proservo NMS81
3 Product description
3.1 Product design
A0028698
1 Design of Proservo NMS81

1 Housing
2 Display and operating module (can be operated without opening the cover)
3 Process connection (Flange)
4 Displacer
8
7
6
9
4
2
1
A0028866
2 Configuration of NMS81
1 Front cover
2 Display
3 Modules
4 Sensor unit (detector unit and cable)
5 Housing
6 Wire drum
7 Bracket
8 Housing cover
9 Displacer
10 Endress+Hauser
Proservo NMS81 Incoming acceptance and product identification
4 Incoming acceptance and product

identification
4.1 Incoming acceptance

Upon receipt of the goods check the following:
• Are the order codes on the delivery note and the product sticker identical?
• Are the goods undamaged?
• Do the nameplate data match the ordering information on the delivery note?
• If required (see nameplate): Are the Safety Instructions (XA) enclosed?
If one of these conditions is not satisfied, contact your Endress+Hauser Sales Center.
4.2 Product identification

The following options are available for identification of the measuring device:
• Nameplate specifications
• Extended order code with breakdown of the device features on the delivery note
• Enter serial numbers from nameplates in W@M Device Viewer
( www.endress.com/deviceviewer ): All information about the measuring device is
displayed.
• Enter the serial number from the nameplates into the Endress+Hauser Operations App
or scan the 2-D matrix code (QR code) on the nameplate with the Endress+Hauser
Operations App: all the information for the measuring device is displayed.
For an overview of the scope of the associated Technical Documentation, refer to the
following:
• The W@M Device Viewer: Enter the serial number from the nameplate
(www.endress.com/deviceviewer)
• The Endress+Hauser Operations App: Enter the serial number from the nameplate or
scan the 2-D matrix code (QR code) on the nameplate.
Endress+Hauser 11
Incoming acceptance and product identification Proservo NMS81
4.2.1 Nameplate
1
2
Order code: 3 21
Ser. no.: 4
Ext. ord. cd.:
5 22
6
MWP: 7
Tp max.: 8 Ta 9 10
11
Mat.: 12 23
13
FW: 14 Dev.Rev.: 15 ex works
16
Tank ID:
Tank ref.height: 17
Density range: Kg/m³
Ta: 18 24
25
if modification
X = see sep. label
19 20 27 28
Date: 26
A0027791
3 Nameplate
1 Manufacturer address
2 Device name
3 Order code
4 Serial number
5 Extended order code
6 Supply voltage
7 Maximum process pressure
8 Maximum process temperature
9 Permitted ambient temperature (Ta)
10 Temperature resistance of cable
11 Thread for cable entry
12 Material in contact with process
13 Not used
14 Firmware version
15 Device revision
16 Metrology certification numbers
17 Customized parametrization data
18 Ambient temperature range
19 CE mark / C-tick mark
20 Additional information on the device version
21 Ingress protection
22 Certificate symbol
23 Data concerning the Ex approval
24 General certificate of approval
25 Associated Safety Instructions (XA)
26 Manufacturing date
27 RoHS mark
28 QR code for the Endress+Hauser Operations App
12 Endress+Hauser
Proservo NMS81 Incoming acceptance and product identification
Proservo NMS 1
&'./0 Ex d[ia] IIC T4 Ga/Gb
&'()：NMS 2
"#$%
+,-$%(1) 3
+,-$%(2) 4
lm$%(1) 5
lm$%(2) 6
lm$%(3) 7
,-$%(1) 8
j"#$%
Qk 9
+,-$%(3) 10
+,-$%(4) 11
lm$%(4) 12
lm$%(5) 13
lm$%(6) 14
no,-$%(1)(2) 15
no+-$%(1)(2) 16
1234： -20°C～ +60°C
67： 89:;;<=び?@のBC、E/0をGわないでください。
'pqr2sがuvしないことをyzしてからT9を
Uけてください。
PQRはT9をUVしないでください。
XY3485℃Z[のケーブルを`aしてください。
：いたで89のをらないでください。
&'67cdefg XA01600G hi
エンドレスハウザー) 17
A0032435
4 Nameplate Proservo NMS8x for TIIS

1 Product type
2 Ex type
3 Input/Output circuit (1)
4 Input/Output circuit (2)
5 Signal circuit (1)
8 Output circuit (1)
9 Power supply
10 Input/output circuit (3)
11 Input/output circuit (4)
15 Contact output circuit (1) (2)
16 Contact input circuit (1) (2)
17 Drawing number
4.2.2 Manufacturer address

Endress+Hauser SE+Co. KG
Hauptstraße 1
79689 Maulburg, Germany
Address of the manufacturing plant: See nameplate.
4.3 Storage and transport
4.3.1 Storage conditions

• Storage temperature: –50 to +80 °C (–58 to +176 °F)
• Store the device in its original packaging.
Endress+Hauser 13
Incoming acceptance and product identification Proservo NMS81
4.3.2 Transport
NOTICE
Risk of injury
‣ Transport the measuring device to the measuring point in its original packaging.
‣ Take into account the mass center of the device in order to avoid unintended tilting.
‣ Comply with the safety instructions, transport conditions for devices over 18kg
(39.6lbs) (IEC61010).
14 Endress+Hauser
Proservo NMS81 Installation
5 Installation
5.1 Requirements
5.1.1 Type of tanks

Depending on the type of tank and application, different installation procedures are
recommended for NMS8x.
Type of tanks Without guide system With stilling well With guide wires
Fixed roof tank
Floating roof tank
Covered floating roof tank
Pressurized or bullet tank
Tank with agitator or heavy

turbulence
• A stilling well is required in a floating roof tank and a covered floating roof tank.
Endress+Hauser 15
Installation Proservo NMS81
• Guide wires cannot be installed in a floating roof tank. When the measuring wire is
exposed to free space, it may break due to an external shock.
• Installing guide wires is not allowed in pressurized tanks because the wires would
prevent closing the valve for replacing the wire, wire drum, or displacer. NMS8x
installation position is important for applications without the guide wire system in
order to prevent the measuring wire from being broken (refer to Operating
Instructions for details ).
16 Endress+Hauser
Typical tank installation
A B
1 1
6 6
3 3
4 4
5 5
C
1
6
4
5
A0026725
5 Typical tank installation

A Fixed roof tank
B High pressure tank
C Floating roof tank with stilling well
1 NMS8x
2 Ball valve
3 Measuring wire
4 Displacer
5 Stilling well
6 Prothermo NMT53x
Endress+Hauser 17
5.1.2 Displacer selection guide

A wide variety of displacers are available to suit different application. Proper displacer
selection ensures optimal performance and longevity. The following guidelines will assist
you in selecting the most suitable displacer for your application.
Displacer types
The following NMS8x displacers are available.
30 mm (1.18 in) 50 mm (1.97 in) 70 mm (2.76 in) 110 mm (4.33 in)
316L/PTFE 316L/Alloy C/PTFE 316L 316L
A0026731 A0026732
A0026729 A0026730
18 Endress+Hauser
Displacer dimensions
A B
(0.37)
9.5
165.5 (6.52)
185.6 (7.31)
153.6 (6.05)
121 (4.76)
a
a
64 (2.52)
86 (3.39)
3.6 (0.14)
Ø30(1.18)
9.5 (0.37)
Ø30(1.18)
A0029579
A ⌀30 mm (1.18 in) 316L cylindrical displacer

B ⌀30 mm (1.18 in) PTFE cylindrical displacer
a Immersion point
⌀30 mm (1.18 in) 316L ⌀30 mm (1.18 in) PTFE

Item
cylindrical displacer cylindrical displacer
Weight (g) 261 250
Volume (ml) 84.3 118
Balance volume (ml) 41.7 59
The weight, volume, and balance volume are individually determined by each
displacer and also might vary depending on the values stated above.
Endress+Hauser 19
A B
129 (5.08)
129 (5.08)
85 (3.35)
85 (3.35)
a
a
45 (1.77)
45 (1.77)
2.5 (0.09)
Ø50.8 (2)
2.5 (0.09)
Ø50.8 (2)
C
(0.45)
11.5
82.7 (3.26)
46.7 (1.84)
a
35 (1.38)
(0.45)
11.5
Ø50 (1.97)
A0029580
A ⌀50 mm (1.97 in) 316L cylindrical displacer

B ⌀50 mm (1.97 in) AlloyC cylindrical displacer
C ⌀50 mm (1.97 in) PTFE cylindrical displacer
a Immersion point
⌀50 mm (1.97 in) 316L ⌀50 mm (1.97 in) AlloyC ⌀50 mm (1.97 in) PTFE
Item
cylindrical displacer cylindrical displacer cylindrical displacer
Weight (g) 253 253 250
Volume (ml) 143 143 118
Balance volume (ml) 70.7 70.7 59
20 Endress+Hauser
A B
26 (1.02)
90 (3.54)
67 (2.64)
47.6 (1.87)
a a
2 (0.07)
10 (0.39)
Ø110 (4.33)
1 (0.03)
17 (0.67)
Ø70(2.76)
A0029582
A ⌀70 mm (2.76 in) 316L conical displacer

B ⌀110 mm (4.33 in) 316L conical displacer
a Immersion point
Item ⌀70 mm (2.76 in) 316L conical displacer ⌀110 mm (4.33 in) 316L conical displacer
Weight (g) 245 223
Volume (ml) 124 108
Balance volume (ml) 52.8 36.3
Recommended displacer by application
Application Product level Interface level Density
Viscous liquid 50 mm (1.97 in) PTFE Not Recommended Not Recommended
Black oil (e.g. crude 50 mm (1.97 in) 316L 50 mm (1.97 in) 316L 50 mm (1.97 in) 316L
oil, heavy oil) 50 mm (1.97 in) PTFE 50 mm (1.97 in) PTFE 50 mm (1.97 in) PTFE
White oil (e.g. 50 mm (1.97 in) or 50 mm (1.97 in) or 50 mm (1.97 in) or

gasoline, diesel, 70 mm (2.76 in) 316L 70 mm (2.76 in) 316L 70 mm (2.76 in) 316L
heating oil)
Liquefied gas, 50 mm (1.97 in) or 50 mm (1.97 in) or 50 mm (1.97 in) or

LPG/LNG 70 mm (2.76 in) 316L 70 mm (2.76 in) 316L 70 mm (2.76 in) 316L
50 mm (1.97 in) Alloy 50 mm (1.97 in) Alloy C 50 mm (1.97 in) Alloy C

Corrosive liquid C 50 mm (1.97 in) PTFE 50 mm (1.97 in) PTFE
50 mm (1.97 in) PTFE
Endress+Hauser 21
5.1.3 Mounting without a guide system

NMS8x is mounted on a nozzle of the tank roof without a guide system. Sufficient
clearance inside the nozzle is necessary to allow the displacer to move without hitting the
inner walls (for details of D, →  23).
D1
1
d
A0026734
6 No guide system
D1 Inner diameter of the tank nozzle
d Diameter of the displacer
1 Displacer
22 Endress+Hauser
5.1.4 Mounting with a stilling well

The stilling well diameter that is required to protect the measuring wire without disturbing
its operation varies depending on the tank height. The stilling well could either be of
constant diameter, or narrower at its upper part and wider at its lower part. The following
figure shows two examples of the latter case, namely a concentric stilling well and an
asymmetric stilling well.
A B
L3
L3
L1
L1
D1 D1
L2
L2
d d
r p (Lx)
D2 D2
A0029573
7 Mounting with concentric stilling well

A Front view
B Side view
L1 Length from the center of the calibration window to the upper part of the stilling well
L2 Length from the center of the calibration window to the bottom of the stilling well
L3 Length from the center of the calibration window to the bottom of the flange
D1 Diameter of upper part of stilling well
D2 Diameter of stilling well
d Diameter of displacer
p Longitudinal wire position from the center of the flange
(Lx)
r Radial direction offset
Endress+Hauser 23
A B
L3
L3
L1
L1
D1 D1
L2
L2
d d
r p (Lx)
D2 D2
A0026733
8 Mounting with asymmetric stilling well

A Front view
B Side view
L1 Length from the center of the calibration window to the upper part of the stilling well
L2 Length from the center of the calibration window to the bottom of the stilling well
L3 Length from the center of the calibration window to the bottom of the flange
D1 Diameter of upper part of stilling well
D2 Diameter of stilling well
p Longitudinal wire position from the center of the flange
(Lx)
• L3: length from center of the calibration window to the bottom of the flange built-in
NMS8x (77 mm (3.03 in) + flange thickness).
For JIS 10K 150A RF, the flange thickness is 22 mm (0.87 in).
• When using an asymmetric stilling well, take into account the lateral shift of the
displacer and follow the NMS8x mounting direction as shown in the figure.
• To calculate the required stilling well diameters, the formula below should be used.
The following tables contain the necessary parameters in order to calculate the
dimensions of the stilling well. Be sure to have appropriate dimensions of the
stilling well according to each dimension in the table.
• The radial direction offset (r) is required for only the 47 m (154.20 ft) and
55 m (180.45 ft) wire drum. For all other drums, the offset is 0 mm/in.
24 Endress+Hauser
Feature: 110 Description NMS80 NMS81 NMS83 r

(Measuring range; Wire;
Diameter)
47 m (154.20 ft); 316L; 6 mm (0.24 in)

G1
0.15 mm (0.00591 in)
55 m (180.45 ft); 316L 6 mm (0.24 in)

H1
0.15 mm (0.00591 in)
Feature: 120 Description NMS80 NMS81 NMS83 d

(Displacer material; Type)
1AA 316L; 30 mm (1.18 in) cylindrical 30 mm (1.18 in)
1AC 316L; 50 mm (1.97 in) cylindrical 50 mm (1.97 in)
1BE 316L; 70 mm (2.76 in) conical 70 mm (2.76 in)
1BJ 316L;110 mm (4.33 in) conical 110 mm (4.33 in)
2AA PTFE; 30 mm (1.18 in) cylindrical 30 mm (1.18 in)
2AC PTFE; 50 mm (1.97 in) cylindrical 50 mm (1.97 in)
3AC AlloyC276; 50 mm (1.97 in) 50 mm (1.97 in)

cylindrical
4AC 316L polished; 50 mm (1.97 in) 50 mm (1.97 in)

cylindrical
4AE 316L polished; 70 mm (2.76 in) 70 mm (2.76 in)

conical
5AC PTFE; 50 mm (1.97 in) cylindrical, 50 mm (1.97 in)

hygienic white
Parameter Description
p(Lx) Longitudinal wire position from the center of the flange

The value can be determined by using following graph.
s Safety factor recommended: 5 mm (0.197 in)
The following graph shows the lateral shift of the displacer depending on the measured
distance for the different wire drums.
Endress+Hauser 25
p (Lx) (mm) (in)

-1.4 -1.3 -1.2 -1.1 -1.0 -0.9 -0.8 -0.7 -0.6 -0.5 -0.4 -0.3 -0.2 -0.1 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3
-36 -32 -28 -24 -20 -16 -12 -8 -4 0 4 8
0 0
100 2000
4000
200
6000 a
300 8000 b
400 10000 c
12000
d
500
14000 e
600
16000 f
700 18000
800 20000
22000
900
L1, L2 (mm) (in)
24000
1000 26000
1100 28000
1200 30000
32000
1300
34000
1400 36000
1500 38000
1600 40000
42000
1700
44000
1800 46000
1900 48000
50000
2000
52000
2100 54000
2200 56000
A0027997
9 Lateral shift of displacer according to measurement range

a 16 m (A3) (NMS80/NMS81/NMS83)
b 22 m (C2) (NMS80/NMS81/NMS83)
c 28 m (D1) (NMS80/NMS81)
d 36 m (F1) (NMS80/NMS81)
e 47 m (G1) (NMS81)
f 55 m(H1) (NMS81)
Upper diameter of stilling well

The dimension of D1 has to be the largest value of the dimensions D1a, D1b , D1c, and D1d
according to the following formula.
D1 Dimension D1x Dimension

(Example) Description Formula
Example Parameter
>68.1 mm 68.1 mm D1a D1 dimension when the = 2 x ( |p (0)|+ d/2 + s)

(2.68 in) (2.68 in) displacer is at the center of the
calibration window
65.6 mm D1b D1 dimension when the = 2 x (|p (L1)|+ d/2 + s)

(2.58 in) displacer is at the upper part of
the stilling well
26 Endress+Hauser

Example Parameter
50.9 mm D1c D1 dimension when the = 2 x ( |p (L2)|+ s)

(2.00 in) displacer is at the bottom of the
stilling well
D1d D1 dimension when the radial = 2 x (d/2 + r + s)

direction offset is considered.
This calculation is used only
with the 47 m (154.20 ft) wire
drum (G1 in Feature110) and
55 m (180.45 ft) (H1 in feature
110)
Example: L1 = 1 000 mm, L2 = 20 000 mm, d = 50 mm, s = 5.0, 28 m drum
Lower diameter of stilling well

The dimension of D2 has to be the larger value of the dimensions D1 and D2b .
See the table below.
Concentric pipe
Example Parameter
>100.9 mm 68.1 mm D1 Calculated D1 value

(3.97 in) (2.68 in)
100.9 mm D2b D2 dimension when the displacer is = 2 x (|p (L2)| + d/2 + s)

(3.97 in) in L2 length
Example: L2 = 20 000 mm, d = 50 mm, s = 5.0, 28 m drum
Asymmetric pipe
Example Parameter
>84.5 mm 68.1 mm D1 Calculated D1 value

(3.33 in) (2.68 in)
84.5 mm D2b D2 dimension that the displacer can = |p (L2)| + d/2 + s + D1/2
(3.33 in) pass through (nth groove)
Example: L2 = 20 000 mm, d = 50 mm, s = 5.0, 28 m drum
Endress+Hauser 27
Recommendations for NMS8x mounting with a stilling well

Follow the recommendations for mounting NMS8x with a stilling well.
• Keep the pipe connection welds smooth.
• When drilling holes into the pipe, keep the interior surface of the holes clear of
metal chips and burrs.
• Coat or paint the interior surface of the pipe to prevent corrosion.
• Keep the pipe as vertical as possible. Check using a plumb bob.
• Install the asymmetric pipe under the valve and align the centers of the NMS8x and
the valve.
• Set the center of the lower part of the asymmetric pipe in the direction of the lateral
motion.
• Observe the recommendations as per API MPMS chapter 3.1B.
• Confirm grounding between NMS8x and the tank nozzle.
28 Endress+Hauser
5.1.5 Mounting with guide wires

It is also possible to guide the displacer with guide wires to prevent swinging.
A 1
2
3
4
13
B
6
8
C 12
9
D 100 (3.94)
10
11
A0026819
 10 Guide wire; dimensions mm (in)
No. Description
A Calibration chamber
B Spring and sleeve
C Guide wire sleeve
D Crimp tool
1 NMS8x
2 Reducer plate (incl. guide wire option)
3 Spring, SUS304 (incl. guide wire option)
4 Sleeve, SUS316 (incl. guide wire option)
5 Calibration chamber for maintenance
6 Tank
7 Measuring wire
8 Guide wire, SUS316 (incl. guide wire option)
9 Displacer with rings (incl. guide wire option)
10 Anchor hook plate, SUS304 (incl. guide wire option)
11 Welding point
12 Wire ring, SUS316L
13 Flange
Endress+Hauser 29
Guide wire installation
Guide wire installation procedure

1. Install NMS8x [1] on the reducer plate.
2. Perform calibration steps (→  87) before the displacer [3] is attached to the
guide wires.
 Make sure that the displacer does not touch the guide wires during calibration.
This could be done by mounting the NMS8x to the reducer plate [2] prior to
fitting the guide wires [4].
Perform calibration steps so that displacer does not touch the guide wires if the guide
wires are already installed to the reducer plate.
3. Secure the guide wires to the hooks of the springs [5].

4. Secure the springs to the reducer plate.
5. Put the guide wires through the displacer guide ring [6] and set the displacer.
This completes the guide wire installation procedure.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
1
3 6
4
A0026887
 11 Guide wire installation

1 NMS8x
2 Reducer plate
3 Displacer
4 Guide wires
5 Springs
6 Displacer guide ring
30 Endress+Hauser
5.1.6 Alignment of NMS8x

Flange
Confirm that the size of the nozzle and the flange is matched prior to mounting NMS8x on
the tank. The flange size and the rating of NMS8x vary depending on the customer’s
specifications.
• Check the flange size of NMS8x.
• Mount the flange on the top of the tank. The deviation of the flange from the
horizontal plane should not exceed +/- 1 degree.
• When mounting NMS8x on a long nozzle, make sure that the displacer does not
touch the inner wall of the nozzle.
-1° +1°
A0026889
 12 Allowable inclination of mounting flange

1 Nozzle
When NMS8x is installed without a guide system, follow the recommendations below:
• Confirm the mounting nozzle is in the sector between 45 and 90 degrees (or -45
and -90 degrees)away from the inlet pipe of the tank. This prevents heavy swinging
of the displacer caused by waves or turbulence from the inlet liquid.
• Confirm the mounting nozzle is 500 mm (19.69 in) or more away from the tank
wall.
• Confirm the minimum measuring level is at 500 mm (19.69 in) or more above the
top of the inlet pipe by setting the low stop (for details of low stop setting,
→  96). This protects the displacer from direct flow of the inlet liquid.
• If a stilling well cannot be mounted in the tank due to the shape or condition of the
tank, attaching a guide system is recommended. Consult E+H services for further
information.
Endress+Hauser 31
-90° 90°
2
-45° 45°
0°
1 2
≥500 (19.69)
≥500 (19.69)
1
A0026890
 13 Recommended position for mounting NMS8x and minimum measuring level; dimensions mm (in)
1 Inlet pipe
2 Tank nozzle
• Before pouring liquid into the tank, confirm that liquid flowing through the inlet of
the pipe will not contact the displacer directly.
• When discharging liquid out of the tank, ensure that the displacer will not get
caught in the liquid current and sucked into the outlet pipe.
5.1.7 Electrostatic charge

When liquid measured by NMS8x has a conductivity of 1 uS/m or less, it is quasi-
nonconductive. In this case, using a stilling well or guide wire is recommended. This
releases the electrostatic charge on the liquid surface.
32 Endress+Hauser
5.2 Mounting of the device

The NMS8x is delivered in two different packing styles depending on the mounting
method of the displacer.
• For the all-in-one method, the displacer is mounted on the measuring wire of NMS8x.
• For the displacer shipped separately method, it is necessary to install the displacer on
the measuring wire inside NMS8x.
5.2.1 Available installations

The following installation procedures are available for NMS8x.
• Mounting without guide system
• Mounting with stilling well
• Mounting with guide wire
Mounting Without guide system

With stilling well With guide wire
options (Free-space mounting)
Type of tanks
Type of • All-in one • All-in one Displacer shipped

installations • Displacer shipped separately • Displacer shipped separately separately
• Displacer installation • Displacer installation
through calibration window through calibration window
Endress+Hauser 33
5.2.2 Verification of displacer and wire drum

Prior to installation of NMS8x, confirm that the serial numbers of displacer and the wire
drum match with those printed to the label attached on the housing.
1.
Ser.no.: 98765432109
Wiredrum
Spare part-no.: 712xxxxx
Range 28 m
Cir. 302.xxxmm
NMS8
O-Ring HNBR
WireWgt. 1.35g/10m
NMS8
9
10
Sp
Ra ing H 12xx
are
32
O- rt-no.:
54
ng
pa
R
76
e
2. 3
28
98
m
7
NB xxx
o.:
r. n
R
Se
Ser.no.: 12345678901
Displacer

mD 256.6 g
VD 141.6 ml
NMS8
VB 70.8 ml
Ø 50 316L
12345678901
712xxxxx
mD 256.6g
VD 141.6mL
VB 70.8mL
!50 316L
A0028025
 14 Verification of displacer and wire drum
34 Endress+Hauser
5.2.3 Tools to be required for installation

The following tools are required when installing NMS8x.
Tools Figures Notes
Box end wrench Use the following size

• 24 mm (0.94 in)
• 26 mm (1 in)
• 30 mm (1.2 in)
• 32 mm (1.3 in)
Crescent wrench Use the size of 350 mm (13.78 in)
Allen key Use the size of 3 mm (0.12 in)or 5 mm (0.17 in)
Screw driver
• Cross-head screwdriver
• Flat-blade screwdriver
Wire cutters or terminal

pliers
Crimp terminal A:
A
Signal and power supply:

0.2 to 2.5 mm2 (24 to 13 AWG)
• Ground terminal in the terminal
compartment: max. 2.5 mm2 (13 AWG)
• Ground terminal at the housing: max.
4 mm2 (11 AWG)
Water pump pliers
Density calibration test This tool is used especially for density

weight measurement application (optional).
Endress+Hauser 35
5.2.4 Installation for all-in-one

In the case of a 50 mm (1.97 in) or 70 mm (2.76 in) diameter displacer, the device can be
delivered by all-in-one method.
Displacer is shipped separately according to the following specifications.
• 47 m (154.2 ft) measuring range
• 55 m (180.5 ft) measuring range
• 110 mm (4.33 in) measuring range
• NPS8 in flange
• Cleaned from oil+grease option
6 5 2
3
A0027013
 15 Removing packing materials

1 Tape
2 Fixing band
3 Displacer holder
4 Wire drum stopper
5 Drum housing cover
6 Screws and bolts
Steps Procedures Notes
1. Hold the gauge so that it stays horizontal • Perform these steps before mounting NMS8x on
against the flange. the nozzle.
• Do not tilt NMS8x after removing the displacer
1 2. Cut the fixing bands [2]. holder.
3. Remove the displacer holder [3] and

packing material of the displacer.
4. Mount NMS8x on the nozzle . • Make sure that the measuring wire hangs
vertically.
2
• Confirm that there are no kinks or other defects
in the measuring wire.
5. Remove screws and M6 bolts [6] (M10 Be sure not to lose the O-ring and the fixing bolts
bolts for stainless steel housing) to remove for the cover of the drum housing.
3 the drum housing cover [5].
6. Loosen two screws and remove the wire

drum stopper [4].
36 Endress+Hauser
Steps Procedures Notes
7. Remove the tape [1] from the wire drum • Remove the tape by hands to avoid damaging
carefully. the wire drum.
4
• Make sure that the measuring wire is wound so
that it fits correctly in the grooves.
5 8. Mount the drum housing cover. Confirm that the O-ring is in the drum housing
cover.
6
9. Turn on the power of NMS8x.  Sensor, reference, and drum calibration steps
are not required because they are all
performed prior to delivery.
Endress+Hauser 37
5.2.5 Installation for displacer shipped separately method

It is necessary to remove the wire drum from NMS8x, remove the tape on the wire drum,
mount the wire drum in the drum housing, and install the displacer on the measuring
wire.
Use blocks or a pedestal to secure NMS8x and provide an environment where electrical
power can be supplied to NMS8x.
Procedures Figures
1. Secure NMS8x on the blocks or pedestal.
200 (7.87)
200 (7.87)
2. Confirm that there is enough space under NMS8x.
 Be careful not to drop NMS8x.
130 (5.12) 130 (5.12)
Dimensions mm (in)
Remove screws and M6 bolts [6] (M10 bolts for

3.
stainless steel housing).
4. Remove the wire drum cover [5], wire drum stopper [4],
and the bracket [2].
5. Remove the wire drum [1] from the drum housing.
6. Remove the tape [3] on the wire drum. 1

2
4
7. Unwind the measuring wire approximately 5
250 mm (9.84 in) so that the wire ring is positioned
under the flange.
3
8. Mount the wire drum on NMS8x.
6
9. Mount the bracket. A0027015
 • Take special care to not hit the wire drum against the
housing due to strong magnet force.
• Handle the measuring wire with care. It may kink.
• Be sure that the wire is wound correctly in the grooves.
10. Hook the displacer [3] on the ring [2].
 •• Be sure that the wire is wound correctly in the grooves.

If not, remove the displacer and the wire drum, and
repeat step 7.
2
3
A0029115
38 Endress+Hauser
Procedures Figures
11. Turn on the power of NMS8x.
12. Perform sensor calibration

5
13. Secure the displacer [2] to the measuring wire [1] using
the securing wire [4].
14. Install the ground wire [3] of the displacer (for details of
displacer ground wire installation →  42).
15. Perform reference calibration.

4
1
16. Turn off the power.
2
17. Mount the wire drum cover [5].
 •• For sensor calibration, →  89

For reference calibration, →  91.
3
A0027016
18. Mount NMS8x on the tank nozzle [1].
19. Confirm that the displacer does not touch the inner wall
of the nozzle.
20. Turn on the power.
21. Perform drum calibration.

1
 For drum calibration, →  92
A0027018
Endress+Hauser 39
5.2.6 Installation through the calibration window

In the case of a 50 mm (1.97 in) diameter displacer, the displacer can be installed through
the calibration window.
It is only possible to install the following displacers through the calibration window:
50 mm SUS, 50 mm alloy C, 50 mm PTFE
Procedures Figures
1. Remove the calibration window cover [1].
A0027019
2. Remove M6 bolts and screws [6] (M10 bolts for stainless

steel housing).
3. Remove the cover [5], wire drum stopper [4], and the 1
bracket [3]. 3
4
5
4. Remove the wire drum [1] from the drum housing.
5. Remove the tape [2] that is securing the wire. 2

6
 Handle the measuring wire with care. It may kink. A0029117
6. Holding the wire drum [1] with one hand, unwind the 1
measuring wire [3] approximately 500 mm (19.69 in).
2
7. Secure the wire [3] temporarily with the tape [2].
8. Insert the wire ring [4] into the drum housing.
9. Pull the wire ring out through the calibration window.

3
 Handle the measuring wire with care.

4
A0027020
10. Insert the wire drum [4] temporarily into the drum
housing. 4
11. Hook the displacer [3] on the wire ring.
12. Secure the displacer to the measuring wire using the

securing wire [2].
1
13. Install the ground wire [1] for the displacer (for details of
displacer ground wire installation →  42).
 • Take special care to not hit the wire drum against the
housing due to strong magnet force. 2
• Handle the measuring wire with care. It may kink. 3
A0027983
40 Endress+Hauser
Procedures Figures
14. Remove the wire drum from the drum housing and 1
unwind the measuring wire approximately
500 mm (19.69 in).
15. Hold the wire drum [1] up and place the displacer [2] into
the calibration window.
16. Hold the displacer at the center of the calibration

window.
17. Hold the other hand (wire drum) up to add tension to the
measuring wire in order not to drop the displacer rapidly.
2
A0027985
18. Let go of the displacer [2].
19. Remove the tape from the wire drum [5].
20. Insert the wire drum into the drum housing.
21. Mount the bracket [4].
 Be sure that the wire is wound correctly in the grooves.

22. Turn on the power of NMS8x and move the displacer up 5
using the Move displacer wizard→  88 until the wire
ring can be seen in the calibration window.
4
 • Confirm that there are no kinks or other defects in the
measuring wire.
• Confirm that the displacer does not touch the inner wall
1
of the nozzle.
23. Perform sensor calibration.

3
 For sensor calibration, →  89
2
24. Perform reference calibration.

A0027987
 For reference calibration, →  91.
25. Mount the drum housing cover [3] and the calibration
window cover [1].
26. Perform drum calibration.
 For drum calibration, →  92
Endress+Hauser 41
5.2.7 Displacer ground wire installation

Depending on the application and Ex requirements, electrical grounding of the displacer is
required. There are different procedures depending on the displacer type, which are
described below.
For details of displacer installation →  33
Standard displacer installation

1. Mount the displacer [3] on the wire ring [1].
2. Wind the securing wire [4] on the wire hook.
3. Wind the ground wire [2] between the washers [5] twice.
 If grounding is not required for non-explosion-proof applications, skip this step.
4. Secure the nut [6] with a wrench [7].
This completes the displacer installation procedure.
1. 2. 3. 4.
1 2
2 6
4 5
3 7
A0028694
 16 Displacer installation
1 Wire ring
2 Ground wire
3 Displacer
4 Securing wire
5 Washer
6 Nut
7 Wrench
PTFE displacer installation

1. Remove the screw [1] using a flathead screwdriver.
2. Mount the displacer [4] on the PFA covered ring [2].
3. Remove the PFA cover approximately 10 mm (0.39 in) for conductivity.
4. Install the ground wire [6] onto the displacer from the wire insertion slot [3] until
the ground wire contacts to the wall of the screw hole [5].
5. Tighten the screw [1].
 Hold the ground wire with finger tips so that the wire does not come out from the
slot.
6. Lift the displacer using a screwdriver and confirm that the ground wire does not
come out from the slot.
This completes the PTFE displacer installation.
42 Endress+Hauser
1. 1 2 2.
4
5
3. 4.
10 (0.39)
5. 6.
A0028696
 17 PTFE displacer installation; dimensions mm (in)

1 Screw
2 PFA covered ring
3 Wire insertion slot
4 Displacer
5 Screw hole
6 Ground wire
5.3 Post-installation check

m Is the device undamaged (visual inspection)?
Does the device conform to the measuring point specifications?

For example:
• Process temperature
m • Process pressure (refer to the chapter on "Material load curves" of the "Technical Information"
document)
• Ambient temperature range
• Measuring range
m Are the measuring point identification and labeling correct (visual inspection)?
m Is the device adequately protected from precipitation and direct sunlight?
Endress+Hauser 43
Electrical connection Proservo NMS81
6 Electrical connection
6.1 Terminal assignment
D 1 2 3 4
1
E
1
1
2
D 1 2 3 4
E 2
CDI
C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
i
1
F 21 3
4
B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CDI
G 1
2
POWER
HR
WP
SIM
on
A 1 2 3 4 C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
F 12 3
4
B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1
G2 HR
3 on
WP A 1 2 3 4
POWER SIM
G1 N AC 85...264 V
G3 L
A0027012
 18 Terminal compartment (typical example) and ground terminals
Terminal area A/B/C/D (slots for I/O modules)

Module: Up to four I/O modules, depending on the order code
• Modules with four terminals can be in any of these slots.
• Modules with eight terminals can be in slot B or C.
The exact assignment of the modules to the slots is dependent on the device version
→  47.
Terminal area E
Module: HART Ex i/IS interface
• E1: H+
• E2: H-
Terminal area F
Remote display
• F1: VCC (connect to terminal 81 of the remote display)
• F2: Signal B (connect to terminal 84 of the remote display)
• F3: Signal A (connec t to terminal 83 of the remote display)
• F4: Gnd (connect to terminal 82 of the remote display)
Terminal area G (for High voltage AC power supply and Low voltage AC power
supply)
• G1: N
• G2: not connected
• G3: L
Terminal area G (for Low voltage DC power supply)
• G1: L-
• G2: not connected
• G3: L+
Terminal area: Protective ground
Module: Protective ground connection (M4 screw)
44 Endress+Hauser
Proservo NMS81 Electrical connection
A0018339
 19 Terminal area: Protective ground
6.1.1 Power supply
CDI
E
1
1
2
D 1 2 3 4
4
C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
F 21 3
4
B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2
1
G2 HR
1
3 on
WP A 1 2 3 4
POWER SIM
CDI
F 12 3
4
1
G2 HR
3 WP
POWER SIM
G1 N AC 85...264 V
A0033413
G1 N
G2 not connected
G3 L
4 Green LED: indicates power supply
The supply voltage is also indicated on the nameplate.
Supply voltage
High voltage AC power supply:
Operational value:
100 to 240 VAC (- 15 % + 10 %) = 85 to 264 VAC , 50/60 Hz
Low voltage AC power supply:
Operational value:
65 VAC (- 20 % + 15 %) = 52 to 75 VAC , 50/60 Hz
Low voltage DC power supply:
Operational value:
24 to 55 VDC (- 20 % + 15 %) = 19 to 64 VDC
Power consumption
Maximum power varies depending on the configuration of the modules. The value shows
maximum apparent power, select the applicable cables accordingly. The actual consumed
effective power is 12 W.
High voltage AC power supply:
28.8 VA
Low voltage AC power supply:
21.6 VA
Low voltage DC power supply:
13.4 W
Endress+Hauser 45
6.1.2 Remote display and operating module DKX001
Gnd
Vcc
A B
81 82 83 84
1 F 12 3
4
2
HR
D 1 2 3 4
F1 F2 F3 F4
1
E 2
1
CDI
F 12 3
4
i
C
B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
WP
3 1
G2
3
HR
WP
on
A 1 2 3 4
Gnd
Vcc
POWER SIM
B A
A0037025
 20 Connection of the remote display and operating module DKX001 to the Tank Gauging device (NMR8x,
NMS8x or NRF8x)
1 Remote display and operating module
2 Connecting cable
3 Tank Gauging device (NMR8x, NMS8x or NRF8x)
The remote display and operating module DKX001 is available as an accessory. For
details refer to SD01763D.
• The measured value is indicated on the DKX001 and on the local display and
operating module simultaneously.
• The operating menu cannot be accessed on both modules at the same time. If the
operating menu is entered in one of these modules, the other module is
automatically locked. This locking remains active until the menu is closed in the
first module (back to measured value display).
6.1.3 HART Ex i/IS interface
D 1 2 3 4
1
E 2
1
CDI
C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
F 21 3
4
B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1
G2 HR
3 on
WP A 1 2 3 4
POWER SIM
1
E 2
3
1
CDI
A0033414
E1 H+
E2 H-
3 Orange LED: indicates data communication
This interface always operates as the main HART master for connected HART slave
transmitters. The Analog I/O modules, on the other hand, can be configured as a
HART master or slave →  59 →  61.
46 Endress+Hauser
6.1.4 Slots for I/O modules

The terminal compartment contains four slots (A, B, C and D) for I/O modules. Depending
on the device version (ordering features 040, 050 and 060) these slots contain different
I/O modules. The table below shows which module is located in which slot for a specific
device version.
The slot assignment for the device is also indicated on a label attached to the back
cover of the display module.
Spare
Ser.-n parts
Spare
o.: 8A for:
1 part 21ACProser
2 Cover 098A vo NM
3 Displa F4 S81
4 Display
er
www.endress.com/deviceview
Ma y asm
in ele
Additional information:
5 ctr. . Spare
IOM no./st
-V1
6 Slot 7102 ructur
IOM A
-A/ 71023451 e
7 Slot RTD 71023451
IOM B
-D XP 3451
8 Slot AAF0002-A
IO C EA
Mo XP EB AB
9 Slot d FF F0 EF ICR
XP 002-A LALC +
10 SMSD XPF0002-AAB 76
11 Detecelectr. F0
XP 002-AAB EG
EF
Dis tor F0 EF
pla XP 002-AAB EG+
EF
12 cer XPF0002-AAB EG+
Wire
Dru XPF0002-AABEFEG+
F0 EF
m XP 002-AAB EG+
F0 EF
7127 002-AABEFEG+
71223689 AB EG+
EF +
XP xxxx EG
1
AAF0002-A +
XPAAAC AB
2,3 F0 DE EF
AA 002-A FE EG
4-8 HA G+ +
9 10 HC AACA
HR
12 IJJ BADJ
AJBK +
P
11
A
A0030120
1 Label showing (among other things) the modules in the slots A to D.

A Cable entry for slot A
B Cable entry for slot B
C Cable entry for slot C
D Cable entry for slot D
List of abbreviations used in table "Primary Output" (040) = "Modbus" (A1)

• O - Ordering feature
• T - Terminal area
• 040 - Primary Output
• 050 - Secondary IO Analog
• 060 - Secondary IO Digital Ex d/XP
• M - Modbus
• D - Digital
• A/XP - Analog Ex d/XP
• A/IS - Analog Ex i/IS
Endress+Hauser 47
"Primary Output" (040) = "Modbus" (A1)

O 1) T 2)
NMx8x - xxxx XX XX XX ...

040 050 060
040 3) 050 4) 060 5)
D
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A0023888
A1 X0 X0 M - - -
A1 X0 A1 M - - D
A1 X0 A2 M - D D
A1 X0 A3 M D D D
A1 X0 B1 M M - -
A1 X0 B2 M M - D
A1 X0 B3 M M D D
A1 A1 X0 M A/XP - -
A1 A1 A1 M A/XP - D
A1 A1 A2 M A/XP D D
A1 A1 B1 M M A/XP -
A1 A1 B2 M M A/XP D
A1 A2 X0 M A/XP A/XP -
A1 A2 A1 M A/XP A/XP D
A1 A2 B1 M A/XP A/XP M
A1 B1 X0 M A/IS - -
A1 B1 A1 M A/IS - D
A1 B1 A2 M A/IS D D
A1 B1 B1 M M A/IS -
A1 B1 B2 M M A/IS D
A1 B2 X0 M A/IS A/IS -
A1 B2 A1 M A/IS A/IS D
A1 B2 B1 M A/IS A/IS M
A1 C2 X0 M A/IS A/XP -
A1 C2 A1 M A/IS A/XP D
A1 C2 B1 M A/IS A/XP M
1) Ordering feature
2) Terminal area
3) Primary Output
4) Secondary IO Analog
5) Secondary IO Digital Ex d/XP
48 Endress+Hauser
List of abbreviations used in table "Primary Output" (040) = "V1" (B1)

• V1 - Sakura V1
• M - Modbus
• D - Digital
Endress+Hauser 49
"Primary Output" (040) = "V1" (B1)

O 1) T 2)

040 050 060
040 3) 050 4) 060 5)
D
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A0023888
B1 X0 X0 V1 - - -
B1 X0 A1 V1 - - D
B1 X0 A2 V1 - D D
B1 X0 A3 V1 D D D
B1 X0 B1 V1 M - -
B1 X0 B2 V1 M - D
B1 X0 B3 V1 M D D
B1 A1 X0 V1 A/XP - -
B1 A1 A1 V1 A/XP - D
B1 A1 A2 V1 A/XP D D
B1 A1 B1 V1 M A/XP -
B1 A1 B2 V1 M A/XP D
B1 A2 X0 V1 A/XP A/XP -
B1 A2 A1 V1 A/XP A/XP D
B1 A2 B1 V1 A/XP A/XP M
B1 B1 X0 V1 A/IS - -
B1 B1 A1 V1 A/IS - D
B1 B1 A2 V1 A/IS D D
B1 B1 B1 V1 M A/IS -
B1 B1 B2 V1 M A/IS D
B1 B2 X0 V1 A/IS A/IS -
B1 B2 A1 V1 A/IS A/IS D
B1 B2 B1 V1 A/IS A/IS M
B1 C2 X0 V1 A/IS A/XP -
B1 C2 A1 V1 A/IS A/XP D
B1 C2 B1 V1 A/IS A/XP M
1) Ordering feature
2) Terminal area
3) Primary Output
50 Endress+Hauser
List of abbreviations used in table "Primary Output" (040) = "WM550" (C1)

• WM550 - Whessoe WM550
• D - Digital
• M - Modbus
Endress+Hauser 51
"Primary Output" (040) = "WM550" (C1)

O 1) T 2)

040 050 060
040 3) 050 4) 060 5)
D
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A0023888
C1 X0 X0 WM550 - - -
C1 X0 A1 WM550 - - D
C1 X0 A2 WM550 - D D
C1 X0 A3 WM550 D D D
C1 X0 B1 WM550 M - -
C1 X0 B2 WM550 M - D
C1 X0 B3 WM550 M D D
C1 X0 E1 WM550 WM550 - -
C1 X0 E2 WM550 WM550 - D
C1 X0 E3 WM550 WM550 D D
C1 A1 X0 WM550 A/XP - -
C1 A1 A1 WM550 A/XP - D
C1 A1 A2 WM550 A/XP D D
C1 A1 B1 WM550 M A/XP -
C1 A1 B2 WM550 M A/XP D
C1 A1 E1 WM550 WM550 A/XP -
C1 A1 E2 WM550 WM550 A/XP D
C1 A2 X0 WM550 A/XP A/XP -
C1 A2 A1 WM550 A/XP A/XP D
C1 A2 B1 WM550 A/XP A/XP M
C1 A2 E1 WM550 A/XP A/XP WM550
C1 B1 X0 WM550 A/IS - -
C1 B1 A1 WM550 A/IS - D
C1 B1 A2 WM550 A/IS D D
C1 B1 B1 WM550 M A/IS -
C1 B1 B2 WM550 M A/IS D
C1 B1 E1 WM550 WM550 A/IS -
C1 B1 E2 WM550 WM550 A/IS D
C1 B2 X0 WM550 A/IS A/IS -
C1 B2 A1 WM550 A/IS A/IS D
52 Endress+Hauser
O 1) T 2)

040 050 060
040 3) 050 4) 060 5)
D
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A0023888
C1 B2 B1 WM550 A/IS A/IS M
C1 B2 E1 WM550 A/IS A/IS WM550
C1 C2 X0 WM550 A/IS A/XP -
C1 C2 A1 WM550 A/IS A/XP D
C1 C2 B1 WM550 A/IS A/XP M
C1 C2 E1 WM550 A/IS A/XP WM550
1) Ordering feature
2) Terminal area
3) Primary Output
List of abbreviations used in table "Primary Output" (040) = "4-20mA HART Ex d" (E1)
• M - Modbus
• D - Digital
Endress+Hauser 53
"Primary Output" (040) = "4-20mA HART Ex d" (E1)

O 1) T 2)

040 050 060
040 3) 050 4) 060 5)
D
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A0023888
E1 X0 X0 - A/XP - -
E1 X0 A1 - A/XP - D
E1 X0 A2 - A/XP D D
E1 X0 A3 D A/XP D D
E1 X0 B1 M A/XP - -
E1 X0 B2 M A/XP - D
E1 X0 B3 M A/XP D D
E1 A1 X0 - A/XP A/XP -
E1 A1 A1 - A/XP A/XP D
E1 A1 A2 D A/XP A/XP D
E1 A1 B1 M A/XP A/XP -
E1 A1 B2 M A/XP A/XP D
E1 B1 X0 - A/XP A/IS -
E1 B1 A1 - A/XP A/IS D
E1 B1 A2 D A/XP A/IS D
E1 B1 B1 M A/XP A/IS -
E1 B1 B2 M A/XP A/IS D
1) Ordering feature
2) Terminal area
3) Primary Output
List of abbreviations used in table "Primary Output" (040) = "4-20mA HART Ex i" (H1)
• M - Modbus
• D - Digital
54 Endress+Hauser
"Primary Output" (040) = "4-20mA HART Ex i" (H1)

O 1) T 2)

040 050 060
040 3) 050 4) 060 5)
D
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
A0023888
H1 X0 X0 - A/IS - -
H1 X0 A1 - A/IS - D
H1 X0 A2 - A/IS D D
H1 X0 A3 D A/IS D D
H1 X0 B1 M A/IS - -
H1 X0 B2 M A/IS - D
H1 X0 B3 M A/IS D D
H1 A1 X0 - A/IS A/XP -
H1 A1 A1 - A/IS A/XP D
H1 A1 A2 D A/IS A/XP D
H1 A1 B1 M A/IS A/XP -
H1 A1 B2 M A/IS A/XP D
H1 B1 X0 - A/IS A/IS -
H1 B1 A1 - A/IS A/IS D
H1 B1 A2 D A/IS A/IS D
H1 B1 B1 M A/IS A/IS -
H1 B1 B2 M A/IS A/IS D
1) Ordering feature
2) Terminal area
3) Primary Output
Endress+Hauser 55
6.1.5 Terminals of the "Modbus" module, "V1" module or "WM550"

module
D 1 2 3 4
1
E 2 D 1 2 3 4
1
CDI
C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
i D1-4
F 12 3
4
B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A 1 2 3 4
HR
on
POWER
WP A 1 2 3 4
SIM
A1-4
A0031200
 21 Designation of the "Modbus", "V1" or "WM550" modules (examples); depending on the device version these
modules may also be in slot B or C.
Depending on the device version, the "Modbus" and/or "V1" or "WM550" module may be in
different slots of the terminal compartment. In the operating menu the "Modbus" and "V1"
or "WM550" interfaces are designated by the respective slot and the terminals within this
slot: A1-4, B1-4, C1-4, D1-4.
Terminals of the "Modbus" module
Designation of the module in the operating menu: Modbus X1-4; (X = A, B, C or D)
• X1 1)
• Terminal name: S
• Description: Cable shielding connected via a capacitor to EARTH
• X2 1)
• Terminal name: 0V
• Description: Common reference
• X3 1)
• Terminal name: B-
• Description: Non-inverting signal line
• X4 1)
• Terminal name: A+
• Description: Inverting signal line
1) Here, "X" stands for one of the slots "A", "B", "C", or "D".
56 Endress+Hauser
Terminals of the "V1" and "WM550" module

Designation of the module in the operating menu: V1 X1-4 or WM550 X1-4; (X = A, B, C
or D)
• X1 2)
• Terminal name: S
• Description: Cable shielding connected via a capacitor to EARTH
• X2 1)
• Terminal name: -
• Description: not connected
• X3 1)
• Terminal name: B-
• Description: Protocol loop signal -
• X4 1)
• Terminal name: A+
• Description: Protocol loop signal +
6.1.6 Terminals of the "Analog I/O" module (Ex d /XP or Ex i/IS)
D 1 2 3 4
1
E 2
CDI
1 C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
i
C1-3 C4-8
F 12 3
4
B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
HR
on
POWER
WP A 1 2 3 4
SIM
B1-3 B4-8
A0031168
Terminal: B1-3
Function: Analog input or output (configurable)
• Passive usage: →  59
• Active usage: →  61
• Designation in the operating menu:
Analog I/O B1-3 (→  213)
Terminal: C1-3
Function: Analog input or output (configurable)
• Passive usage: →  59
• Active usage: →  61
Analog I/O C1-3 (→  213)
Terminal: B4-8
Function: Analog input
• RTD: →  62
Analog IP B4-8 (→  207)
2) Here, "X" stands for one of the slots "A", "B", "C", or "D".
Endress+Hauser 57
Terminal: C4-8
Function: Analog input
• RTD: →  62
Analog IP C4-8 (→  207)
58 Endress+Hauser
6.1.7 Connection of the "Analog I/O" module for passive usage

• In the passive usage the supply voltage for the communication line must be supplied
by an external source.
• The wiring must be in accordance with the intended operating mode of the Analog
I/O module; see the drawings below.
"Operating mode" = "4..20mA output" or "HART slave +4..20mA output"
D 1 2 3 4
1
E 2
1
CDI
D 1 2 3 4
C
1
CDI
E
1
2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
F 12 3
4
B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
i
1
G2
F 12 3
HR
3 on
WP A 1 2 3 4
POWER SIM
4
B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1
G2
G HR
3 on
WP A 1 2 3 4
a
POWER SIM c
-
+
!
b
A0027931
 22 Passive usage of the Analog I/O module in the output mode

a Power supply
b HART signal output
c Analog signal evaluation
"Operating mode" = "4..20mA input" or "HART master+4..20mA input"
D 1 2 3 4
1
E 2
1
CDI
D 1 2 3 4
C
1
CDI
E
1
2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
F 12 3
4
B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
i
1
G2
F 12 3
HR
3 on
WP A 1 2 3 4
POWER SIM
4
B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1
G2
G HR
3 on
WP A 1 2 3 4
a
POWER SIM
–
+ b
!
A0027933
 23 Passive usage of the Analog I/O module in the input mode

a Power supply
b External device with 4...20mA and/or HART signal output
Endress+Hauser 59
"Operating mode" = "HART master"
D 1 2 3 4
1
E 2
1
CDI
D 1 2 3 4
C
1
CDI
E
1
2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
F 12 3
4
B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
i
1
G2
F 12 3
HR
3 on
WP A 1 2 3 4
POWER SIM
4
B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1
G2
G HR
3 on
WP A 1 2 3 4
a
POWER SIM
–
+ b
A0027934
 24 Passive usage of the Analog I/O module in the HART master mode
a Power supply
b Up to 6 external devices with HART signal output
60 Endress+Hauser
6.1.8 Connection of the "Analog I/O" module for active usage

• In the active usage the supply voltage for the communication line is supplied by the
device itself. There is no need of an external power supply.
• The wiring must be in accordance with the intended operating mode of the Analog
I/O module; see the drawings below.
• Maximum current consumption of the connected HART devices: 24 mA
(i.e. 4 mA per device if 6 devices are connected).
• Output voltage of the Ex-d module: 17.0 V@4 mA to 10.5 V@22 mA
• Output voltage of the Ex-ia module: 18.5 V@4 mA to 12.5 V@22 mA
"Operating mode" = "4..20mA output" or "HART slave +4..20mA output"
D 1 2 3 4
1
E 2
1
CDI
D 1 2 3 4
C
1
CDI
E
1
2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
F 12 3
4
B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
i
1
G2
F 12 3
HR
3 on
WP A 1 2 3 4
POWER SIM
4
B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1
G2
G HR
3 on
WP A 1- 2 3 +4
POWER SIM b
a
A0027932
 25 Active usage of the Analog I/O module in the output mode

a HART signal output
b Analog signal evaluation
"Operating mode" = "4..20mA input" or "HART master+4..20mA input"
D 1 2 3 4
1
E 2
1
CDI
D 1 2 3 4
C
1
CDI
E
1
2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
F 21 3
4
B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
i
1
G2
F 12 3
HR
3 on
WP A 1 2 3 4
POWER SIM
4
B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1
G2
G HR
3 on
POWER
WP A 1- 2 3 +4
SIM
A0027935
 26 Active usage of the Analog I/O module in the input mode

a External device with 4...20mA and/or HART signal output
Endress+Hauser 61
"Operating mode" = "HART master"
D 1 2 3 4
1
E 2
1
CDI
D 1 2 3 4
C
1
CDI
E
1
2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
F 12 3
4
B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
i
1
G2
F 12 3
HR
3 on
WP A 1 2 3 4
POWER SIM
4
B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1
G2
G HR
3 on
POWER
WP A 1 2 3 4
SIM
- +
A0027936
 27 Active usage of the Analog I/O module in the HART master mode
a Up to 6 external devices with HART signal output
The maximum current consumption for the connected HART devices is 24 mA (i.e.
4 mA per device if 6 devices are connected).
6.1.9 Connection of a RTD
A B C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A0026371
A 4-wire RTD connection

B 3-wire RTD connection
C 2-wire RTD connection
62 Endress+Hauser
6.1.10 Terminals of the "Digital I/O" module
D 1 2 3 4
1
E 2 C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1
CDI
C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
i C1-2 C3-4
F 12 3
4
B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A 1 2 3 4
HR
on
POWER
WP A 1 2 3 4
SIM
A1-2 A3-4
A0026424
 28 Designation of the digital inputs or outputs (examples)
• Each Digital IO Module provides two digital inputs or outputs.

• In the operating menu each input or output is designated by the respective slot and two
terminals within this slot. A1-2, for example, denotes terminals 1 and 2 of slot A. The
same is valid for slots B, C and D if they contain a Digital IO module.
• For each of these pairs of terminals, one of the following operating modes can be
selected in the operating menu:
• Disable
• Passive Output
• Passive Input
• Active Input
Endress+Hauser 63
6.2 Connecting requirements
6.2.1 Cable specification
Terminals
Wire cross section 0.2 to 2.5 mm2 (24 to 13 AWG)
Use for terminals with function: Signal and power supply
• Spring terminals (NMx8x-xx1...)
• Screw terminals (NMx8x-xx2...)
Wire cross section max. 2.5 mm2 (13 AWG)
Use for terminals with function: Ground terminal in the terminal compartment
Wire cross section max. 4 mm2 (11 AWG)
Use for terminals with function: Ground terminal at the housing
Power supply line

Standard device cable is sufficient for the power line.
HART communication line

• Standard device cable is sufficient if only the analog signal is used.
• Shielded cable is recommended if using the HART protocol. Observe the grounding
concept of the plant.
Modbus communication line

• Observe the cable conditions from the TIA-485-A, Telecommunications Industry
Association.
• Additional conditions: Use shielded cable.
V1 communication line
• 2-wire twisted pair, screened or unscreened cable
• Resistance in one cable: ≤ 120 Ω
• Capacitance between lines: ≤ 0.3 µF
WM550 communication line

• 2-wire twisted pair, unscreened cable
• Cross section minimum 0.5 mm2 (20 AWG)
• Maximum total cable resistance: ≤ 250 Ω
• Cable with low capacitance
64 Endress+Hauser
6.3 Ensuring the degree of protection

To guarantee the specified degree of protection, carry out the following steps after the
electrical connection:
1. Check that the housing seals are clean and fitted correctly. Dry, clean or replace the
seals if necessary.
2. Tighten all housing screws and screw covers.
3. Firmly tighten the cable glands.
4. To ensure that moisture does not enter the cable entry, route the cable so that it
loops down before the cable entry ("water trap").

A0013960
5. Insert blind plugs appropriate for the safety rating of the device (e.g. Ex d/XP).
6.4 Post-connection check

m Are cables or the device undamaged (visual inspection)?
m Do the cables comply with the requirements?
m Do the cables have adequate strain relief?
m Are all cable glands installed, firmly tightened and correctly sealed?
m Does the supply voltage match the specifications on the transmitter nameplate?
m Is the terminal assignment correct →  44?
m If required: Is the protective earth connected correctly ?
If supply voltage is present: Is the device ready for operation and do values appear on the display
m
module?
m Are all housing covers installed and firmly tightened?
m Is the securing clamp tightened correctly?
Endress+Hauser 65
Operability Proservo NMS81
7 Operability
7.1 Overview of the operation options

The device is operated via an operating menu →  67. This menu can be accessed by
the following interfaces:
• The display and operating module at the device or the remote display and operating
module DKX001 (→  68).
• FieldCare connected through the service interface in the terminal compartment of the
device (→  80).
• FieldCare connected through Tankvision Tank Scanner NXA820 (remote operation;
→  80).
• FieldCare connected through Commubox FXA195 (→  154) to a HART interface of
the device.
Confirm that the servo motor stops before changing parameters for safety use.
66 Endress+Hauser
Proservo NMS81 Operability
7.2 Structure and function of the operating menu

Menu Submenu / Meaning
parameter
Operation Proservo Contains parameters to operate

parameters Proservo (e.g. Gauge command).
Level Shows the measured and calculated

level values.
Temperature Shows the measured and calculated

temperature values.
Density Shows the measured and calculated

density values.
Pressure Shows the measured and calculated

pressure values.
GP values Shows the general purpose values.
Setup Standard Standard commissioning parameters

parameters
Calibration Calibration of the measurement
Advanced setup Contains further parameters and

submenus:
• to adapt the device to special
measuring conditions.
• to process the measured value.
• to configure the signal output.
Diagnostics Diagnostic Indicates:

parameters • The latest diagnostic messages and
their timestamps.
• The operating time (overall time and
time since last restart).
• The time according to the real-time
clock.
Diagnostic list Contains up to 5 currently active error

messages.
Device information Contains information needed to

identify the device.
Simulation Used to simulate measured values or

output values.
Device check Contains all parameters needed to

check the measurement capability of
the device.
Expert 1) System Contains all general device parameters

Contains all parameters of the device (including which do not affect the measurement
those which are already contained in one of the or the communication interface.
other menus). This menu is organized
according to the function blocks of the device. Sensor Contains all parameters needed to
configure the measurement.
The parameter of the Expert menu are
described in: Input/output Contains submenus to configure the
GP01077G (NMS81) analog and discrete I/O modules and
connected HART devices.
Communication Contains all parameters needed to

configure the digital communication
interface.
Application Contains submenus to configure

• the tank gauging application
• the tank calculations
• the alarms.
Endress+Hauser 67
Menu Submenu / Meaning

parameter
Tank values Shows measured and calculated tank

values
Diagnostics Contains all parameters needed to

detect and analyze operational errors.
1) On entering the "Expert" menu, an access code is always requested. If a customer specific access code has
not been defined, "0000" has to be entered.
7.3 Access to the operating menu via the local or remote

display and operating module
• Operating via the remote display and operating module DKX001 (→  46) or the
local display and operating module at the device are equivalent.
• The measured value is indicated on the DKX001 and on the local display and
operating module simulataneously.
• The operating menu cannot be accessed on both modules at the same time. If the
operating menu is entered in one of these modules, the other module is
automatically locked. This locking remains active until the menu is closed in the
first module (back to measured value display).
7.3.1 Display and operating elements

The device has an illuminated liquid crystal display (LCD) that shows measured and
calculated values as well as the device status in the standard view. Other views are used to
navigate through the operating menu and to set parameter values.
The device is operated by three optical keys, namely "-", "+" and "E". They are actuated when
the appropriate field on the protective glass of the front is touched with the finger ("touch
control").
XX
XX
XX
XX
X
mm
1
2
A0028345
 29 Display and operating elements

1 Liquid crystal display (LCD)
2 Optical keys; can be operated through the cover glass.
68 Endress+Hauser
7.3.2 Standard view (measured value display)
2 XXXXXXXXX F 3
# 4841.00 4
5 mm
Level bal. 6
7
8
A0028702
 30 Typical appearance of the standard view (measured value display)

1 Display module
2 Device tag
3 Status area
4 Display area for measured values
5 Display area for measured value and status symbols
6 Gauge status indication
7 Gauge status symbol
8 Measured value status symbol
Status symbols
Symbol Meaning
"Failure"
A device error is present. The measured value is no longer valid.
A0013956
"Function check"
The device is in service mode (e.g. during a simulation).
A0013959
"Out of specification"
The device is operated:
• Outside of its technical specifications (e.g. during startup or a cleaning)
A0013958
• Outside of the configuration carried out by the user (e.g. level outside configured span)
"Maintenance required"
Maintenance is required. The measured value is still valid.
A0013957
Measured value symbols

Symbol 1 Symbol 2 Measured value
• Tank level
• Measured level
A0028148
• Tank level %
Water level
A0028149
Liquid temperature
A0028528
Vapor temperature
A0028528 A0027990
Air temperature
A0028528 A0027991
• Tank ullage
• Tank ullage %
A0027993
Observed density value

A0028150
Endress+Hauser 69
Symbol 1 Symbol 2 Measured value
Average profile density

A0028150 A0027991
P1 (bottom)
1
A0028151 A0028141
P2 (middle)
2
A0028151 A0028142
P3 (top)
3
A0028151 A0028146
GP 1 value
1 This is used for an external device.
A0027992 A0028141
GP 2 value
2
A0027992 A0028142
This is used for an external device.
GP 3 value
3
A0027992 A0028146
This is used for an external device.
GP 4 value
4 This is used for an external device.
A0027992 A0028147
Upper I/F level

A0028149 A0028529
Lower I/F level

A0028149 A0027989
Upper density
A0028150 A0028529
Middle density
A0028150 A0013957
Lower density
A0028150 A0027989
Bottom level
A0028145
Displacer position
A0027994
Gauge command and gauge status symbols

Symbol 1 Symbol 2 Meaning
Gauge command
A0028139 This shows current command.
Gauge status
: Displacer is unbalanced (Level/Interface not found yet).
A0028143 A0028144
A0027995 A0028138 A0028140
: Displacer is balanced (Level/Interface measurement valid).
: Displacer is moving up.
: Displacer is moving down.
: Displacer stopped.
70 Endress+Hauser
Measured value status symbols

Symbol Meaning
Status "Alarm"
The measurment is interrupted. The output assumes the defined alarm value. A diagnostic
message is generated.
A0012102
Status "Warning"
The device continues measuring. A diagnostic message is generated.
A0012103
Calibration to regulatory standards disturbed

Is displayed in the following situations:
A0031169
• The write protection switch is OFF. →  78
• The write protection switch is ON but the level value can currently not be guaranteed because
the displacer is not balanced.
Locking state symbols

Symbol Meaning
Display parameter
Marks display-only parameters which cannot be edited.
A0011978
Device locked
• In front of a parameter name: The device is locked via software and/or hardware.
A0011979 • In the header of the measured value screen: The device is locked via hardware.
Meaning of the keys in the standard view

Key Meaning
Enter key
• Pressing the key briefly opens the operating menu.
• Pressing the key for 2 s opens the context menu:
• Level (visible if the keylock is inactive):
Shows the measured levels.
A0028326 • Keylock on (visible if the keylock is inactive):
Activates the keylock.
• Keylock off (visible if the keylock is active):
Deactivates the keylock.
Endress+Hauser 71
7.3.3 Navigation view
1 /../Setup 00215-1 2
Empty
10,000.00 mm
Set level
Calibration 3
A0028347-EN
 31 Navigation view
1 Current submenu or wizard
2 Quick access code
3 Display area for navigation
Navigation symbols
Symbol Meaning
Operation
Is displayed:
A0011975
• in the main menu next to the selection Operation
• in the header, if you are in the Operation menu.
Setup
Is displayed:
A0011974
• in the main menu next to the selection Setup
• in the header, if you are in the Setup menu
Expert
Is displayed:
• in the main menu next to the selection Expert
A0011976
• in the header, if you are in the Expert menu
Diagnostics
Is displayed:
• in the main menu next to the selection Diagnostics
A0011977
• in the header, if you are in the Diagnostics menu
Submenu
A0013967
Wizard
A0013968
Parameter locked
When displayed in front of a parameter name, indicates that the parameter is locked.
A0013963
72 Endress+Hauser
Meaning of the keys in the navigation view

Key Meaning
Minus key
Moves the selection bar upwards in a picklist.
A0028324
Plus key
Moves the selection bar downwards in a picklist.
A0028325
Enter key
• Pressing the key briefly opens the selected menu, submenu or
parameter.
A0028326 • For parameters: Pressing the key for 2 s opens the help text for the
function of the parameter (if present).
Escape key combination (press keys simultaneously)

• Pressing the keys briefly
• Exits the current menu level and takes you to the next higher level.
• If help text is open, closes the help text of the parameter.
A0028327
• Pressing the keys for 2 s returns you to the measured value display
("standard view").
7.3.4 Wizard view
1 /../Set level
Set level
0 mm
Level 5000.0 mm
2
A0028350-EN
 32 Wizard view on the display module

1 Current wizard
2 Display area for navigation
Wizard navigation symbols

Symbol Meaning
Parameters within a wizard
A0013972
Switches to the previous parameter.
A0013978
Confirms the parameter value and switches to the next parameter.
A0013976
Opens the editing view of the parameter.
A0013977
In the wizard view the meaning of the keys is indicated by the navigation symbol
directly above the respective key (softkey functionality).
Endress+Hauser 73
7.3.5 Numeric editor
1 20
0 1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8 9
2
A0028341
 33 Numeric editor on the display module

1 Display area of the entered value
2 Input mask
Symbol Meaning
Selection of numbers from 0 to 9.

0
…
9
A0013998
. Inserts decimal separator at the input position.
A0016619
Inserts minus sign at the input position.

–
A0016620
Confirms selection.
A0013985
Moves the input position one position to the left.
A0016621
Exits the input without applying the changes.
A0013986
Clears all entered characters.
A0014040
Meaning of the keys in the numeric editor

Key Meaning
Minus key
In the input mask, moves the selection bar to the left (backwards).
A0028324
Plus key
In the input mask, moves the selection bar to the right (forwards).
A0028325
Enter key
• Pressing the key briefly adds the selected number to the current
decimal place or carries out the selected action.
A0028326
• Pressing the key for 2 s confirms the edited parameter value.

Closes the text or numeric editor without applying changes.
A0028327
74 Endress+Hauser
7.3.6 Text editor
A0028342
 34 Text editor on the display module

1 Display area of the entered text
2 Input mask
Text editor symbols

Symbol Meaning
Selection of letters from A to Z

ABC _
…
XYZ
A0013997
Toggle
Aa1 • Between upper-case and lower-case letters
• For entering numbers
A0013981
• For entering special characters
Confirms selection.
A0013985
Switches to the selection of the correction tools.
A0013987
Exits the input without applying the changes.
A0013986
A0014040
Correction symbols under

A0013989
Moves the input position one position to the right.
A0013991
Moves the input position one position to the left.
A0013990
Deletes one character immediately to the left of the input position.
A0013988
Endress+Hauser 75
Meaning of the keys in the text editor

Key Meaning
Minus key
In the input mask, moves the selection bar to the left (backwards).
A0028324
Plus key
In the input mask, moves the selection bar to the right (forwards).
A0028325
Enter key
• Pressing the key briefly
• Opens the selected group.
A0028326 • Carries out the selected action.
• Pressing the key for 2 s confirms the edited parameter value.

Closes the text or numeric editor without applying changes.
A0028327
7.3.7 Keypad lock
Automatic keypad lock

Operation via the local display is automatically locked:
• after a start-up or restart of the device.
• if the device has not been operated via the display for > 1 minute.
When attempting to access the operating menu while the keylock is enabled, the
Keylock on message appears.
Disabling the keypad lock

1. The keylock is enabled.
Press  for at least 2 seconds.
 A context menu appears.
2. Select Keylock off from the context menu.
 The keylock is disabled.
Manual activation of the keypad lock

After commissioning of the device the keypad lock can be activated manually.
1. The device is in the measured value display.
Press  for at least 2 seconds.
 A context menu appears.
2. Select Keylock on from the context menu.
 The keylock is enabled.
76 Endress+Hauser
7.3.8 Access code and user roles
Meaning of the access code

An access code can be defined in order to distinguish between the following user roles:
User role Definition
Maintenance • Knows the access code.

• Has write access to all parameters (except service parameters).
Operator • Doesn't know the access code.

• Has write access to only a few parameters.
• The description of parameters states which role is needed at least for read and write
access to each parameter.
• The current user role is indicated by the Access status display parameter.
• If the access code is "0000", every user is in the Maintenance role. This is the
default setting on delivery of the device.
Defining an access code

1. Navigate to: Setup → Advanced setup → Administration → Define access code
→ Define access code
2. Enter the intended access code (max. 4 digits).
3. Repeat the same code in the Confirm access code parameter.
 The user is in the Operator role. The -symbol appears in front of all write-
protected parameters.
Switching to the "Maintenance" role

If the -symbol appears on the local display in front of a parameter, the parameter is
write-protected because the user is in the Operator role. To switch to the Maintenance
role, proceed as follows:
1. Press .
 The input prompt for the access code appears.
2. Enter the access code.
 The user is in the Maintenance role. The -symbol in front of the parameters
disappears; all previously write-protected parameters are now re-enabled.
Switching back to the "Operator" role automatically

The user automatically switches back to the Operator role:
• if no key is pressed for 10 minutes in the navigation and editing mode.
• 60 s after going back from the navigation and editing mode to the standard view
(measured value display).
Endress+Hauser 77
7.3.9 Write protection switch

The operating menu can be locked by a hardware switch in the connection compartment.
In this locking state W&M related parameters are read only.
HR
on
WP A 1 2
SIM
3 mm
2.5 Nm (1.84 lbf ft)
A0028693
The display module can be attached to the edge of the electronics compartment. This
makes it easier to access the lock switch.
1. Loosen the securing clamp.
2. Unscrew the housing cover.
3. Pull out the display module with a gentle rotation movement.
4. Using a flat blade screwdriver or a similar tool, set the write protection switch (WP)
into the desired position. ON: operating menu is locked; OFF: operating menu is
unlocked.
5. Put the display module onto the connection compartment, screw the cover closed and
tighten the securing clamp.
To avoid acces to the write protection switch, the cover of the connection
compartment can be secured by a lead seal.
A0033285
 35 Sealing of the cover of the connection compartment
78 Endress+Hauser
A0033452
 36 Sealing of the rear cover (e.g NMS81/NMS83)
For LNE approval, bolts at built in flange additionally must be secured by a lead seal.
A0028695
 37 NMS81: Display module attached to the edge of the terminal compartment
Indication of the locking state
XXXXXXXXX
20.50
XX XX
A0015870
 38 Write protection symbol in the header of the display
Write protection via locking switch is indicated as follows:

• Locking status (→  199) = Hardware locked
•  appears in the header of the display.
Endress+Hauser 79
7.4 Access to the operating menu via the service

interface and FieldCare
CD
1 I
2
A0026993
 39 Operation via service interface

1 Service interface (CDI = Endress+Hauser Common Data Interface)
2 Commubox FXA291
3 Computer with "FieldCare" operating tool and "CDI Communication FXA291" COM DTM
The "Save/Restore" function

After a device configuration has been saved to a computer and restored to the device
using the Save/Restore function of FieldCare, the device must be restarted by the
following setting:
Setup → Advanced setup → Administration → Device reset = Restart device.
This ensures correct operation of the device after the restore.
7.5 Access to the operating menu via Tankvision Tank

Scanner NXA820 and FieldCare
7.5.1 Wiring scheme
5
6
NXA820
1 2 3
A0025621
 40 Connection of Tank Gauging devices to FieldCare via the Tankvision Tank Scanner NXA820
1 Proservo NMS8x
2 Tankside Monitor NRF81
3 Micropilot NMR8x
4 Field protocol (e.g. Modbus, V1)
5 Tankvision Tank Scanner NXA820
6 Ethernet
7 Computer with FieldCare installed
80 Endress+Hauser
7.5.2 Establishing the connection between FieldCare and the device

1. Make sure the HART CommDTM NXA is installed and update the DTM catalogue if
required.
2. Create a new project in FieldCare.
3.
A0028515
Add a new device: NXA HART Communication

4.
A0028516
Open the configuration of the DTM and enter the required data (IP address of the
NXA820; "Password" = "hart"; "Tank identification" only with NXA V1.05 or higher)
Endress+Hauser 81
5.
A0028517
Select Create network from the context menu.

 The device is detected and the DTM is assigned.
6.
A0032427
 The device can be configured.

following setting:
82 Endress+Hauser
Proservo NMS81 System integration
8 System integration
8.1 Overview of the Device Description files (DTM)

To integrate the device via HART into FieldCare, a Device Description file (DTM) according
to the following specification is required:
Manufacturer ID 0x11
Device type (NMS8x) 0x112D
HART specification 7.0
DD files For information and files see:

www.endress.com
Endress+Hauser 83
Commissioning Proservo NMS81
9 Commissioning
9.1 Terms related to tank measurement
14
17 1
15
16
13
4
A
F 10
2
9
8
5
7
6
C
12 11 3
H
A0026916
 41 Terms concerning NMS8x installation (e.g. NMS81)

A Liquid level
B Upper interface
C Lower interface
D Gas phase
E Upper phase
F Middle phase
G Lower phase
H Tank bottom
1 Gauge reference height
2 Empty
3 Datum plate
4 Tank ullage
5 Tank level
6 Tank reference height
7 High stop level
8 Displacer position
9 Standby level
10 Upper interface level
11 Lower interface level
12 Low stop level
13 Dipping reference
84 Endress+Hauser
Proservo NMS81 Commissioning
14 Mechanical stop
15 Slow hoist zone
16 Distance
17 Reference position
9.2 Initial settings

Depending on NMS8x specification, some of the initial settings described below may not
be required.
9.2.1 Setting the display language

Setting the display language via the display module
1. While in the standard view (→  69), press "E". If required, select Keylock off from
the context menu and press "E" again.
 The Language parameter appears.
2. Open the Language parameter and select the display language.
Setting the display language via an operating tool (e.g. FieldCare)

1. Navigate to: Setup → Advanced setup → Display → Language
2. Select the display language.
This setting only affects the language on the display module. To set the language in
the operating tool use the language setting functionality of FieldCare or DeviceCare,
respectively.
9.2.2 Setting the real-time clock

Setting the real-time clock via the display module
1. Navigate to: Setup → Advanced setup → Date / time → Set date
2. Use the following parameters to set the the real-time clock to the current date and
time: Year, Month, Day, Hour, Minutes.
Setting the real-time clock via an operating tool (e.g. FieldCare)

1. Navigate to: Setup → Advanced setup → Date / time
2.
Go to the Set date parameter and select the Start option.
Endress+Hauser 85
3.
Use the following parameters to set the date and time: Year, Month, Day, Hour,
Minutes.
4.
Go to the Set date parameter and select the Confirm time option.
 The real-time clock is set to the current date and time.
86 Endress+Hauser
9.3 Calibration
After installing or replacing NMS8x or its parts (sensor module, detector unit, wire drum,
or measuring wire), several calibration steps are required. All calibration steps may not be
required, depending on whether the device is being installed, adjusted, or replaced (see
table below).
Type of installation/replacement Calibration step
Sensor calibration Reference calibration Drum calibration
All-in one Not required Not required Not required
Displacer shipped separately Required Required Required
Displacer installation through Required Required Required

calibration window
Replacement/ Drum Required Required Required

maintenance
Displacer Not required Required Required
Sensor module Not required Required Required
Detector unit Required Required Required
9.3.1 Verification of displacer and wire drum

Prior to installation of NMS8x, confirm that all of the following data of the displacer and
the wire drum on the nameplate match with those programmed into the device.
Parameters to be confirmed
Parameters Navigate to:
Displacer diameter Setup → Advanced setup → Sensor config → Displacer → Displacer diameter
Displacer weight Setup → Advanced setup → Sensor config → Displacer → Displacer weight
Displacer volume Setup → Advanced setup → Sensor config → Displacer → Displacer volume
Displacer balance volume Setup → Advanced setup → Sensor config → Displacer → Displacer balance
volume
Drum circumference Setup → Advanced setup → Sensor config → Wiredrum
Wire weight Expert → Sensor → Sensor config → Wiredrum → Wire weight
Endress+Hauser 87
Data verification
Data verification procedure

1. Check the displacer diameter, weight, volume, and balance volume for the Displacer
diameter parameter, the Displacer weight parameter, the Displacer volume
parameter, and the Displacer balance volume parameter.
2. Check the drum circumference and wire weight for the Drum circumference
parameter and Wire weight parameter.
This completes the data verification procedure.
Ser.no.: 12345678901
/../Displacer 08010-1
Wiredrum
Displacer diamet Range 28 m
Cir. 302.xxx mm
NMS8
Displacer weight O-Ring HNBR
256.6g WireWgt. 1.35g/10m
Displacer volume
Ser.no.: 12345678901
Displacer
mD 256.6 g
VD 141.6 ml
NMS8
VB 70.8 ml
Ø 50 316L
A0028697
 42 Data verification
9.3.2 Move displacer

The move displacer operation is optional and can be used to change the current position of
the displacer in order to perform the calibration steps more easily.
1. Make sure that the wire drum stopper has been removed.
2. Navigate to: Setup → Calibration → Move displacer → Move distance
3. Input the relative moving distance for the Move distance parameter.
4. Select the Move down option or the Move up option
5. Select the Yes.
This completes move displacer commands procedure.
88 Endress+Hauser
A0029119
 43 Move displacer
9.3.3 Sensor calibration

Sensor calibration adjusts the weight measurement of the detector unit. The calibration
consists of three steps as follows.
• ADC zero calibration
• ADC offset calibration
• ADC span calibration
For the ADC offset weight calibration, either 0 g or an offset weight (0 to 100 g) can be
used.
Using an offset weight other than 0 g is recommended for density measurement.
m
mS
mO1
mO2
mz
B
A0029472
 44 Concept of sensor calibration

m Weight of displacer
B Binary value of AD-Converter
mS Span weight
mo1 Offset weight in case of 0 to 100 g (50 g is recommended.)
mo2 Offset weight in case of 0 g
mz Zero weight
Endress+Hauser 89
Calibration procedure
Step Using displacer Using offset weight Description
1. • Navigate to: Setup → Calibration → Sensor calibration

→ Sensor calibration
• Input the offset weight for the Offset weight
parameter used in step 3 (0.0 g in case of using the
displacer only).
• Input the value for the Span weight parameter used in
step 4 (weight of displacer indicated on nameplate).
A0028000 A0028000
2. • Hold up or remove the displacer.

• Select for next parameter.
• Measuring zero weight option is shown on the
display.
• Wait until the Zero calibration parameter shows the
Finished option and calibration status shows Idle.
A0027999 A0028001
 When the displacer is being held up, do not release
it until this step is completed.
3. • Confirm that the Offset calibration parameter shows

the Place offset weight option.
• Hold up the displacer or attach the offset weight.
• Measuring offset weight option is shown on the
display.
• Wait until the Offset calibration parameter shows the
Finished option and Calibration status shows Idle.
A0027999 A0028002
 When the displacer is being held up, do not release
it until this step is completed.
4. • Release the displacer or mount it on the measuring

ring if an offset weight was used in the previous step.
• Measuring span weight option is shown on the
display.
• Confirm that the Span calibration parameter shows
the Finished option and Calibration status shows Idle.
• Select the Next option.
• Confirm that the Sensor calibration parameter shows
the Calibration finished option and Calibration status
shows Idle.
A0028000 A0028000
This completes sensor calibration procedure.
 aDoposition
not swing the displacer and keep it in as stable
as possible.
90 Endress+Hauser
9.3.4 Reference calibration

The reference calibration defines the zero distance position of the displacer from the
mechanical stop.
1. Navigate to: Setup → Calibration → Reference calibration → Reference calibration
2. Select the Start option
3. Check the reference position (e.g. 70 mm (2.76 in)).
 The reference position is preset prior to delivery.
4. Confirm that the displacer is correctly attached to the measuring wire.
5. The reference calibration starts automatically.
This completes the reference calibration.
1. 2. 3.
1
R
A0029121
 45 Reference calibration sequence

1 Mechanical stop
R Reference position
Endress+Hauser 91
9.3.5 Drum calibration

1. Navigate to: Setup → Calibration → Drum calibration → Drum calibration
2. Ensure a distance of 500 mm (19.69 in) or more from the bottom of the displacer to
the liquid level.
3. Confirm that the displacer weight is correct for the Set high weight parameter.
4. Select the Start option.
 The drum calibration starts automatically.
The drum calibration records fifty points which will take approximately eleven
minutes.
5. Select the No option as usual for the Make low table parameter.
 To make a low table for special applications, select the Yes and use 50 g weight.
This completes drum calibration procedure.
To cancel any calibration, press  +  simultaneously. If the drum calibration is

canceled while making the new table, the old table remains effective. If making a new
table fails due to an obstruction, NMS8x will not accept the new table and shows an
error message.
1
2
3…
50
A0029122
 46 Making drum table
92 Endress+Hauser
9.3.6 Commissioning check

This procedure is to confirm that all calibration steps have been completed appropriately.
1. Navigate to: Diagnostics → Device check → Commissioning check → Commissioning
check
2. Select the Start option.
 Executing option is shown on the verify drum table.
3. Select the Next option.
4. Confirm that the Commissioning check wizard shows the Finished option.
5. Confirm that the Result drum check parameter is passed.
This completes the commissioning check procedure.
Endress+Hauser 93
9.4 Configuring the measuring device

Configuration task Description
Configuring the level and interface Setting density →  94

measurement
Setting tank height →  95
Setting high and low stop →  96
Level calibration Setting for open tank with liquid →  97
Setting for open tank without liquid →  98
Setting for closed tank →  99
Setting process condition →  101
Configuring the density measurement Setting spot density →  102
Setting tank profile →  104
Setting interface profile →  105
Setting manual profile →  106
9.4.1 Configuring the level and interface measurement

The level measurement is to measure the position where the displacer is balanced
(immersion point) in the liquid. When the liquid surface level changes, the displacer
continuously follows the position to measure the liquid level. To define the appropriate
level measurement, the following settings are required prior to operation.
The interface measurement can determine the interface between different liquids in a tank
(e.g. water and oil).Up to two different interfaces can be determined within a maximum of
three phases in a tank.
Setting the density of application

Density values for three liquid phases are set as follows prior to delivery.
• Upper density: 800 kg/m3
• Middle density: 1 000 kg/m3
• Lower density: 1 200 kg/m3
Change the data to reflect the actual density values. For tanks with only one liquid phase,
set the upper density. For tanks with two or three phases, set middle and bottom densities
as well.
Number of phases Parameters to be set
1 phase Upper density
2 phases Upper/middle density
3 phases Upper/middle/lower density
When performing an interface measurement, the minimum density difference

between phases should be at least 100 kg/m3.
Setting the density

1. Navigate to: Setup → Upper density , Setup → Middle density and Setup → Lower
density
2. Input the value to Upper, Middle, and Lower densities accordingly.
94 Endress+Hauser
A0026983
 47 Tank configuration
A Liquid level
B Upper interface
C Lower interface
D Upper phase (density)
E Middle phase (density)
F Lower phase (density)
Setting the tank height

To measure the tank level correctly, the tank reference height and empty (distance from
reference point to datum plate) must be set in advance.
• Tank reference height: Set by the customer to represent the height of the tank.
Distance between the dipping reference and the datum plate. Used for percentage
calculation and as reference for the ullage level.
• Empty: Distance between the zero point of device and datum plate. Empty is
automatically adjusted by the Set level parameter.
• Refer to Level calibration for details how to determine the empty parameter
accurately. →  97
Setting the tank reference height and empty

1. Navigate to: Setup → Empty
2. Input the empty value.
3. Navigate to: Setup → Tank reference height
4. Input the value of tank reference height.
Endress+Hauser 95
4
5
1
2
3
A0028032
 48 Tank height
1 High stop
2 Low stop
3 Datum plate
4 Tank reference height
5 Empty
Setting the high stop and low stop

The high stop and low stop determine the highest and lowest points of displacer
movement. Set these data to the desired actual upper and lower limit values.
If the displacer should be able to determine a tank bottom that is below the datum
plate, set the low stop to a negative value. To make sure that the displacer travels up
to the reference position, set the high stop to a value greater than or equal to empty.
High stop and low stop setting procedure

1. Navigate to: Setup → High stop level
2. Input the actual value for high stop.
3. Navigate to: Setup → Low stop level
4. Input the actual value for low stop.
This completes upper and lower stop setting procedure.
96 Endress+Hauser
9.4.2 Level calibration

The following table shows the most likely options for setting the level calibration.
Open tank with liquid Open tank without liquid Closed tank
a
A0042771 A0029120
A0029126
Setting for an open tank with liquid
Level setting procedure

1. Navigate to: Setup → Gauge command
2. Select the Level option for the Gauge command parameter.
 The displacer automatically searches for the point where it balances.
3. Wait until the displacer is balanced on the liquid.
4. Perform dipping to determine the liquid level (L) in the tank.
5. Navigate to: Setup → Set level
6. Input the determined level value for the Set level parameter.
The Set level parameter adjusts the Empty parameter to reflect the new level value.
This completes setting for open tank with liquid procedure.
1
L
A0028033
 49 Set level for opened tank

1 Displacer
L Measured value
Endress+Hauser 97
Setting for an open tank without liquid

If there is no liquid in the tank, the following procedure can be used to set the tank bottom
or datum plate to 0 mm for the tank level.

1. Navigate to: Operation → Gauge command → Gauge command
2. Select the Bottom level option to measure the tank bottom.
3. Navigate to: Operation → One-time command status
4. Wait until the Finished option is shown.
5. Navigate to: Operation → Level → Bottom level
6. Read the Bottom level parameter (Bv).
8. Read the actual empty value (Ea).
9. Calculate the new empty value using following formula.
 En = Ea - Bv - Z0
10. Input the calculated value for the Empty parameter.

Example: Ea = 28m, Bv = 10.5m, Z0 = 0.5m
En = 28m - 10.5m = 17m
A0029473
• The parameter Z0 defines the distance between the desired 0mm level value and
the physical tank bottom (if displacer measures the datum plate, Z0 = 0 mm (0 in)).
• Bottom level operation considers the immersion depth of the displacer in the
measurement.
This completes the level setting for open tank without liquid procedure.
En
Ea
2
Z0
1
Bv
A0028133
 50 Open tank without liquid

1 Tank bottom
2 Datum plate
Ea Initial empty setting
Bv Initial bottom level
En New empty
Z0 Distance from tank bottom to datum plate
It is recommended to repeating the level calibration when there is liquid in the tank
(→  97).
98 Endress+Hauser
Setting for a closed tank

For tanks that cannot be hand-dipped, follow the procedure shown below.

2. Select the Bottom level option to measure the tank bottom.
 NMS8x measures the tank bottom and returns to level if the post gauge
command is set to level (default).
3. Navigate to: Operation → One-time command status
4. Wait until the Finished option is shown.
5. Navigate to: Operation → Level → Bottom level
6. Read the bottom value (Bv).
7. Navigate to: Operation → Level → Tank level (a)
8. Calculate the level value (L) by using following formula.
 L = a - Bv
9. Navigate to: Setup → Set level
10. Input the value L for the Set level parameter.
This completes the level setting procedure.
If the datum plate is not zero (e.g. Z mm), adjust the set level value (L) by subtracting
Z from the value L (L= a-Bv-Z).
Ea
L
a
2
Bv
1
A0028137
 51 Closed tank for NMS80 and NMS81

1 Initial zero level position
2 Datum plate
Ea Initial setting of Empty
Bv Bottom level
a Tank level
L Set level value
Endress+Hauser 99
Setting for a closed tank without datum plate

For tanks that cannot be hand-dipped and have no datum plates, follow the procedure
shown below.
Procedure for setting level by empty

In cases where a manual dip cannot be carried out and there are no flat datum plates to
reference the bottom, empty can be used instead of set level . In this particular case, empty
needs to be adjusted as it is not the gauge reference height but the displacer immersion
depth.
Level is automatically calculated by the following formula.
Empty - Distance = Level
The absolute value of distance is updated according to the displacer movement and level
can be determined.
2. Set empty to be the displacer immersion depth.
3. Navigate to: Setup → Gauge command
4. Select the Level option for the Gauge command parameter.
 The displacer automatically searches for the point where it balances.
5. Wait until the displacer is balanced on the liquid surface.
This completes the level setting procedure.
A B
a a
b b
c
c
A0039926
 52 Level setting in case of empty (NMS80/81)

A Set empty
B How level is determined
a Gauge reference height
b Empty adjusted to the displacer immersion depth = distance 0 mm
c Empty
d Distance
e Level
100 Endress+Hauser
Selecting the process condition

The process condition is used to adjust the device to the application. By changing this
parameter, several balancing parameters are adjusted automatically to make setup easier.
1. Navigate to: Setup → Process condition
2. Select an appropriate condition for the Process condition parameter.
Parameter
Process condition
name
Parameter
Universal (Default setting) Calm surface Turbulent surface
setting
Description
A0028027 A0028028 A0028029
Provides reliable results in For storage tanks with a calm For applications where the
various applications and for surface and focus on highest surface is turbulent.
various liquids. accuracy measurement.
9.4.3 Configuring the density measurement

The density measurement is performed to confirm and maintain the quality of the liquid.
The density measurement is largely divided into two methods as shown below.
Density methods Gauge command Description
Spot density Upper density One spot density measurement for

Middle density designated layer
Lower density • Upper density is for upper layer.
• Middle density is for middle layer.
• Lower density is for lower layer.
Profile density Tank profile Profile between the bottom of the tank and
the level position
• Normal mode
• Compensation mode
Interface profile Profile between the upper interface (I/F)

and the level position
• Normal mode
Manual profile Profile between the desired start point and

the level position
• Normal mode
Endress+Hauser 101
Spot density measurement

Three different spot density gauge commands are available as shown below.
3
4 1 A
a
2
1 B
a
E 2
1 C
a
F 2
A0029468
 53 Spot density (The numbers show the order of displacer movement.)

A Liquid level
B Upper interface
C Lower interface
D Upper density
E Middle density
F Lower density
a Submersion depth
The submersion depth (a) is set to 150 mm (5.91 in) prior to delivery. To change the
submersion depth, perform the following steps.
1. Navigate to: Setup → Advanced setup → Sensor config → Spot density → Submersion
depth
2. Input the desired value for the Submersion depth parameter.
Setting the spot density

2. Select the Upper density option, the Middle density option, or the Lower density
option for the Gauge command parameter.
3. Verify that the value that was examined in a laboratory and the actual value that was
measured in the tank are the same or within an allowable range.
4. Adjust the value if necessary.
 Navigate to: Setup → Advanced setup → Sensor config → Spot density
Select the Upper density offset parameter , the Middle density offset
parameter, and the Lower density offset parameter and input the desired values
for each offset.
This completes the setting spot density procedure.
102 Endress+Hauser
Profile density measurement

Profile density has three gauge commands as shown below.
NMS8x measures a density profile according to a defined interval of up to 50 points.
C B A
2c 2b 2a
G
1c 1b 1a
D
7c
6b
7a
6c
H 5b
6a
5c
4b
4c 3b 5a E
3c
I
4a F
3a
J
K
A0029105
 54 Overview of profile density (1a, 2a, 3a...show the order of displacer movements.)
A Tank profile
B Interface profile
C Manual profile
D Liquid level
E Upper interface
F Lower interface
G Gas phase
H Upper density
I Middle density
J Lower density
K Tank bottom
Density measurement has two types of modes.

• Normal measure mode: Profile points are measured at exactly configured positions.
• Compensation mode: Profile points are measured at multiples of the wire drum
circumference to further improve accuracy.
Select normal mode as usual. However, when selecting compensation mode, NMS8x
automatically adjusts the measurement positions to where the density measurement
can be the most accurate.
Endress+Hauser 103
Tank profile measurement
Setting tank profile procedure

The tank profile operation measures a profile starting at the physical tank bottom up to
the liquid level.
1. Navigate to: Setup → Advanced setup → Sensor config → Profile density → Profile
density offset distance
2. Input the desired value for the Profile density offset distance parameter.
 The value of the profile density offset distance defines the distance between the
start point (upper interface) and the first measurement point.
density interval
4. Input the desired value for the Profile density interval parameter.
5. Set Tank profile option in the Gauge command parameter to start measurement.
This completes the setting tank profile procedure.
2
1
7
A
6
C
4
B
A0029107
 55 Tank profile movement (The numbers show the order of the displacer movement.)
A Profile density interval
B Profile density offset distance
C Datum plate
D Tank profile range
104 Endress+Hauser
Interface profile measurement
Setting interface profile procedure

The interface profile operation measures a profile starting at the upper interface level up
to the liquid level.
start point (upper interface profile) and the first measurement point.
density interval
5. Set Interface profile option in the Gauge command parameter to start
measurement.
This completes the setting interface profile procedure.
2
1
6
A
5
C
4
B
A0029109
 56 Interface profile movement (The numbers show the order of the displacer movement.)
C Tank profile range
Endress+Hauser 105
Manual profile measurement
Setting manual profile procedure

The manual profile operation measures a profile starting at a manually specified level up
to the liquid level.
1. Navigate to: Setup → Advanced setup → Sensor config → Profile density → Manual
profile level
2. Input the desired value for the Manual profile level parameter.
 For the manual profile, the level offset can be set to 0 so that the first point can
be measured at the manual profile level.
start point (manual profile) and the first measurement point.
density interval
7. Set Manual profile option in the Gauge command parameter to start measurement.
This competes the setting manual profile.
2
1
7
A
6
C
4
B
3
D
A0029111
 57 Manual profile movement (The numbers show the order of the displacer movement.)
C Manual profile range
D Manual profile level
106 Endress+Hauser
9.5 Configuring the tank gauging application

Configuration of the inputs: Description
HART inputs →  108
NMT532/539 connected via HART →  110
4-20mA inputs →  111
RTD input →  112
Digital inputs →  114
Configuration of the data processing in the device: Description
Linking input values to tank variables →  115
Tank calculation: Direct Level Measurement →  116
Tank calculation: Hybrid Tank Measurement System (HTMS) →  117
Tank calculation: Correction of the Hydrostatic Tank Deformation →  118

(HyTD)
Tank calculation: Thermal Tank Shell Correction (CTSh) →  119
Alarms (limit evaluation) →  120
Configuration of the signal output: Description
4-20mA output →  121
HART slave + 4-20mA output →  122
Modbus →  123
V1 →  124
Digital outputs →  125
WM550 →  124
Endress+Hauser 107
9.5.1 Configuration of the HART inputs
Connecting and addressing HART devices
D 1 2 3 4
1
E 2
CDI
1 C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
i
C1-3 C4-8
F 12 3
4
B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
HR
on
POWER
WP A 1 2 3 4
SIM
B1-3 B4-8
A0032955
 58 Possible terminals for HART loops

B Analog I/O module in slot B (availability depending on device version →  47)
C Analog I/O module in slot C (availability depending on device version →  47)
E HART Ex is output (available in all device versions)
HART devices must be configured and given a unique HART address in the range from
1 to 15 via their own user interface before they are connected to the Proservo
NMS8x 3). Make sure they are connected as defined by the terminal assignment
→  57. Devices with an address larger than 15 are not recognized by the Proservo.
Slot B or C: Setting the operating mode of the Analog I/O module

This section is not relevant for the HART Ex is output (Slot E). This output always
functions as a HART master for the connected HART slaves.
If HART devices are connected to an Analog I/O module (slot B or C in the terminal
compartment), this module must be configured as follows:
1. Navigate to the submenu of the respective Analog I/O module: Setup → Advanced
setup → Input/output → Analog I/O X1-3
2. Go to the Operating mode parameter (→  213).
3. If only one HART device is connected to this loop:
Select the HART master+4..20mA input option. In this case the 4-20mA signal can
be used in addition to the HART signal. For the configuration of the 4-20mA input:
→  111.
4. If up to 6 HART devices are connected to this loop:
Select the HART master option.
3) The current software does not support HART devices with adress 0 (zero).
108 Endress+Hauser
Defining the type of measured value

This setting can be skipped for a connected Prothermo NMT5xx as the type of
measured value is automatically recognized by the Proservo NMS8x in this case.
• The measured values can only be used in the system if the unit of the assigned
HART variable fits the type of measured value. The HART variable assigned to
Output temperature, for example, has to be in °C or °F.
• A HART variable with unit "%" can not be used for Output level. Instead, the HART
variable must be in mm, m, ft or in.
The type of measured value must be specified for each HART variable (PV, SV, TV and QV).
To do so, proceed as follows:
1. Navigate to: Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → HART devices
 There is a submenu for each connected HART device.
2. For each device go to the corresponding submenu.
3. If the device measures a pressure:
Go to the Output pressure parameter (→  203) and specify which of the four
HART variables contains the measured pressure. Only a HART variable with a
pressure unit may be selected.
4. If the device measures a density:
Go to the Output density parameter (→  204) and specify which of the four HART
variables contains the measured density. Only a HART variable with a density unit
may be selected.
5. If the device measures a temperature:
Go to the Output temperature parameter (→  204) and specify which of the four
HART variables contains the measured temperature. Only a HART variable with a
temperature unit may be selected.
6. If the device measures the vapor temperature:
Go to the Output vapor temperature parameter (→  205) and specify which of
the four HART variables contains the measured vapor temperature. Only a HART
variable with a temperature unit may be selected.
7. If the device measures a level:
Go to the Output level parameter (→  205) and specify which of the four HART
variables contains the measured level. Only a HART variable with a level unit (not "%")
may be selected.
Disconnecting HART devices

When a HART device is disconnected from the device, it must also be logically removed as
follows:
1. Navigate to Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → HART devices → Forget
device → Forget device
2. Select the HART device to be removed.
This procedure is also necessary if a defective device is exchanged.
Endress+Hauser 109
9.5.2 Configuration of a connected Prothermo NMT532/NMT539

If a Prothermo NMT532 or NMT539 temperature transmitter is connected via HART, it
can be configured as follows:
1. Navigate to: Expert → Input/output → HART devices → HART Device(s) → NMT device
config; here, HART Device(s) is the name of the connected Prothermo.
2. Go to the Configure device? parameter and select Yes.
3. Go to the Bottom point parameter and enter the position of the bottom temperature
element (see picture below).
A0029542
 59 Position of the bottom temperature element

a Distance from bottom temperature element to zero reference (tank bottom or datum plate). The standard
factory default setting is 500 mm (19.69 in), and it can be adjusted according to the actual installation.
To check the temperatures measured by the individual elements, go to the following

submenu: Operation → Temperature → NMT element values → Element temperature
There is a Element temperature X parameter for each element of the Prothermo.
110 Endress+Hauser
9.5.3 Configuration of the 4-20mA inputs
D 1 2 3 4
1
E 2
CDI
1 C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
i
C1-3 C4-8
F 12 3
4
B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
HR
on
POWER
WP A 1 2 3 4
SIM
B1-3 B4-8
A0032464
 60 Possible locations of the Analog I/O modules, which can be used as a 4-20mA input. The order code of the
device determines which of these modules is actually present →  47.
For each Analog I/O module to which a 4-20mA device is connected, proceed as follows:
1. Make sure the 4-20mA devices are connected as defined by the terminal assignment
→  57.
setup → Input/output → Analog I/O X1-3
3. Go to the Operating mode parameter (→  213) and select 4..20mA input or
HART master+4..20mA input.
4. Go to the Process variable parameter (→  219) and specify which process variable
is transmitted by the connected device.
5. Go to the Analog input 0% value parameter (→  219) and define which value of
the process variable corresponds to an input current of 4 mA (see diagram below).
6. Go to the Analog input 100% value parameter (→  219) and define which value
of the process variable corresponds to an input current of 20 mA (see diagram
below).
7. Go to the Process value parameter (→  220) and check whether the indicated
value matches the actual value of the process variable.
I [mA]
20mA
4mA
0% 2 100%
A0029264
 61 Scaling of the 4-20mA input to the process variable

1 Input value in mA
2 Process value
The Analog I/O submenu contains additional parameters for a more detailed
configuration of the Analog Input. For a description refer to : →  213
Endress+Hauser 111
9.5.4 Configuration of a connected RTD
D 1 2 3 4
1
E 2
CDI
1 C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
i
C1-3 C4-8
F 12 3
4
B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
HR
on
POWER
WP A 1 2 3 4
SIM
B1-3 B4-8
A0032465
 62 Possible locations of the Analog I/O modules, to which an RTD can be connected. The order code of the
device determines which of these modules is actually present →  47.
1. Make sure the RTD is connected as defined by the terminal assignment →  62.
setup → Input/output → Analog IP X4-8.
3. Go to the RTD type parameter (→  207) and specify the type of the connected
RTD.
4.
A B C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A0026371
 63 RTD connection types

A 4 wire RTD connection
B 3 wire RTD connection
C 2 wire RTD connection
Go to the RTD connection type parameter (→  208) and specify the type of
connection of the RTD (2-, 3- or 4-wire).
5. Go to the Input value parameter (→  210) and check whether the indicated
temperature matches the actual temperature.
6. Go to the Minimum probe temperature parameter (→  210) and specify the
minimum approved temperature of the connected RTD.
7. Go to the Maximum probe temperature parameter (→  210) and specify the
maximum approved temperature of the connected RTD.
112 Endress+Hauser
8.
3
1
A0042773
1 Datum plate
2 RTD
3 Probe position (→  211)
Go to the Probe position parameter and enter the mounting position of the RTD
(measured from the datum plate).
 This parameter, in conjunction with the measured level, determines whether the
measured temperature refers to the product or to the gas phase.
Offset for resistance and/or temperature

An offset for the resistance or the temperature can be defined in the following
submenu: Expert → Input/output → Analog IP X4-8.
• Ohms offset is added to the measured resistance before the calculation of the
temperature.
• Temperature offset after conversion is added to the measured temperature.
R[Ω] R[Ω]
2
1
T T
A0029265
1 Ohms offset
2 Temperature offset after conversion
Endress+Hauser 113
9.5.5 Configuration of the digital inputs
D 1 2 3 4
1
E 2 C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1
CDI
C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
i C1-2 C3-4
F 12 3
4
B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A 1 2 3 4
HR
on
POWER
WP A 1 2 3 4
SIM
A1-2 A3-4
A0026424
 64 Possible locations of the Digital I/O modules (examples); the order code defines the number and location
of digial input modules →  47.
There is a Digital Xx-x submenu for each digital I/O module of the device. "X" designates
the slot in the terminal compartment, "x-x" the terminals within this slot. The most
important parameters of this submenu are Operating mode and Contact type.
The "Operating mode" parameter

Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → Digital Xx-x → Operating mode
A B
DIO DIO
2/4 2/4
+
_
1/3 1/3
A0029262
A "Operating mode" = "Input passive"

B "Operating mode" = "Input active"
Meaning of the options

• Input passive
The DIO module measures the voltage provided by an external source. Depending on the
status of the external switch, this voltage is 0 at the input (switch open) or exceeds a
certain limit voltage (switch closed). These two states represent the digital signal.
• Input active
The DIO module provides a voltage and uses it to detect whether the external switch is
open or closed.
The "Contact type" parameter

Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → Digital Xx-x → Contact type
114 Endress+Hauser
This parameter determines how the state of the external switch is mapped to the internal
states of the DIO module:
State of the external switch Internal state of the DIO module
Contact type = Normally open Contact type = Normally closed
Open Inactive Active
Closed Active Inactive
Behavior in special situaions:
During start-up Unknown Unknown
Fault in measurement Error Error
• The internal state of the Digital Input can be transferred to a Digital Output or can
be used to control the measurement.
• The Digital Xx-x submenu contains additional parameters for a more detailed
configuration of the Digital Input. For a description refer to →  223.
9.5.6 Linking input values to tank variables

Measured values must be linked to tank variables before they can be used in the Tank
Gauging application. This is done by defining the source of each tank variable in the
following parameters:
Tank variable Parameter defining the source of this variable
Product level • Setup → Level source

• Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank configuration → Level
→ Level source
Bottom water level Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank configuration → Level
→ Water level source
Average or spot temperature of the • Setup → Liquid temp source

product • Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank configuration
→ Temperature → Liquid temp source
Temperature of the air surrounding Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank configuration
the tank → Temperature → Air temperature source
Temperature of the vapor above the Setup → Advanced setup → Tank configuration → Temperature → Vapor
product temp source
Density of the product Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank configuration → Density
→ Observed density source
Bottom pressure (P1) Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank configuration → Pressure
→ P1 (bottom) source
Top pressure (P3) Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank configuration → Pressure
→ P3 (top) source
Depending on the application not all these parameters will be relevant in a given
situation.
Endress+Hauser 115
9.5.7 Tank calculation: Direct level measurement

If no tank calculation is configured, level and temperature are measured directly.
A B
1 3 1
2 2
A0029274
A Direct level measurement (without temperature)

B Direct level and temperature measurement
1 NMS8x
2 To inventory management system
3 Temperature transmitter
1. Navigate to: "Setup → Level source" and specify from which device the level is
obtained.
2. If a temperature transmitter is connected:
Navigate to: "Setup → Liquid temp source" and specify from which device the
temperature is obtained.
116 Endress+Hauser
9.5.8 Tank calculation: Hybrid tank measurement system (HTMS)

HTMS uses level and pressure measurements to calculate the density of the medium.
In non-atmospheric (i.e. pressurized) tanks it is recommended to use the HTMS
P1+P3 mode. Two pressure sensors are required in this case. In atmospheric (i.e.
unpressurized) tanks the HTMS P1 with only one pressure sensor is sufficient.
A B
1 4 1
2 2
D3
D1
D1
3 3
A0029277
A The "HTMS P1" measurement mode

B The "HTMS P1+P3" measurement mode
D1 P1 position
D3 P3 position
1 NMS8x
2 To inventory management system
3 Pressure sensor (bottom)
4 Pressure sensor (top)
1. Navigate to Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank configuration → Level

2. Go to Level source (→  188) and specify from which device the level is obtained.
3. Navigate to Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank configuration → Pressure
4. Go to P1 (bottom) source (→  263) and specify from which device the bottom
pressure (P1) is obtained.
5. If a top pressure transmitter (P3) is connected:
Go to P3 (top) source (→  265) and specify from which device the bottom
pressure (P1) is obtained.
6. Navigate to: Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank calculation → HTMS
7. Go to HTMS mode (→  280) and specify the HTMS mode.
8. Navigate to Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank configuration → Density
9. Go to Observed density source (→  261) and select HTMS.
10. Use the other parameters of the HTMS submenu to configure the calculation. For a
detailed description: →  278
Endress+Hauser 117
9.5.9 Tank calculation: Hydrostatic Tank Deformation (HyTD)

Hydrostatic Tank Deformation can be used to compensate the vertical movement of the
Gauge Reference Height (GRH) due to bulging of the tank shell caused by the hydrostatic
pressure exerted by the liquid stored in the tank. The compensation is based on a linear
approximation obtained from manual hand dips at several levels divided over the full
range of the tank.
C
D
A
A0030164
 65 Correction of the hydrostatic tank deformation (HyTD)

A "Distance" (tank nearly empty)
B Gauge Reference Height (GRH)
C HyTD correction value
D "Distance" (tank filled)
The Correction of the Hydrostatic Tank Deformation is configured in the HyTD

submenu (→  270)
118 Endress+Hauser
9.5.10 Tank calculation: Thermal tank shell correction (CTSh)

CTSh (correction for the thermal expansion of the tank shell) compensates for effects on
the Gauge Reference Height (GRH) and on the expansion or contraction of the measuring
wire due to temperature effects on the tank shell or stilling well. The temperature effects
are separated into two parts, respectively affecting the 'dry' and 'wetted' part of the tank
shell or stilling well. The correction function is based on thermal expansion coefficients of
steel and insulation factors for both the 'dry' and 'wet' parts of the wire and the tank shell.
The temperatures used for the correction can be selected from on manual or measured
values.
This correction is recommended for the following situations:
• if the operating temperature deviates considederably from the temperature during
calibration (ΔT > 10 °C (18 °F))
• for extremely high tanks
• for refrigerated, cryogenic or heated applications
As the use of this correction will influence the innage level reading, it is
recommended to ensure the manual hand dip and level verification procedures are
being conducted correctly before enabling this correction method.
This mode cannot be used in conjunction with HTG because the level is not measured
relative to the gauge reference height with HTG.
Endress+Hauser 119
9.5.11 Configuration of the alarms (limit evaluation)

A limit evaluation can be configured for up to 4 tank variables. The limit evaluation issues
an alarm if the value exceeds an upper limit or falls below a lower limit, respectively. The
limit values can be defined by the user.
A B
10 10
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
A0029539
 66 Principle of the limit evaluation

A Alarm mode = On
B Alarm mode = Latching
1 HH alarm value
2 H alarm value
3 L alarm value
4 LL alarm value
5 HH alarm
6 H alarm
7 L alarm
8 LL alarm
9 "Clear alarm" = "Yes" or power off-on
10 Hysteresis
The limit evaluation is configured in the Alarm 1 to 4 submenus.

Navigation path: Setup → Advanced setup → Alarm → Alarm 1 to 4
For Alarm mode = Latching all alarms remain active until the user selects Clear
alarm = Yes or the power is switched off and on.
Make sure to also configure the parameter "Hysteresis" parameter accordingly,
depending on tank variable and unit used.
120 Endress+Hauser
9.5.12 Configuration of the 4-20mA output
D 1 2 3 4
1
E 2
CDI
1 C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
i
C1-3 C4-8
F 12 3
4
B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
HR
on
POWER
WP A 1 2 3 4
SIM
B1-3 B4-8
A0032464
 67 Possible locations of the Analog I/O modules, which can be used as a 4-20mA output. The order code of
the device determines which of these modules is actually present →  47.
Each Analog I/O module of the device can be configured as a 4...20mA analog output. To
do so, proceed as follows:
1. Navigate to: Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → Analog I/O X1-3.
2. Go to the Operating mode parameter and select 4..20mA output or HART slave
+4..20mA output 4).
3. Go to the Analog input source parameter and select the tank variable which is to be
transmitted via the 4...20mA output.
4. Go to the 0 % value parameter and enter the value of the selected tank variable
which will be mapped to 4 mA.
5. Go to the 100 % value parameter and enter the value of the selected tank variable
which will be mapped to 20 mA.

100%
0%
4mA 2 20mA I [mA]

A0032953
 68 Scaling of the tank variable to the output current

1 Tank variable
2 Output current
After startup of the device, as long as the assigned tank variable is not yet available,
the output current assumes the defined errror value.
The Analog I/O submenu contains more parameters which can be used for a more
detailed configuration of the analog output. For a description see →  213
4) "HART slave +4..20mA output " means that the Analog I/O module serves as a HART slave which cyclically sends up to four HART variables to a
HART master. For the configuration of the HART output: →  122
Endress+Hauser 121
9.5.13 Configuration of the HART slave + 4-20mA output

If Operating mode = HART slave +4..20mA output has been selected for an Analog I/O
module, it serves as a HART slave which sends up to four HART variables to a HART
master.
The 4-20 mA signal can be used in this case, too. For its configuration: →  121
Standard case: PV = 4-20mA signal

By default, the Primary Variable (PV) is identical to the tank variable transmitted by the
4-20mA output. To define the other HART variables and to configure the HART output in
more detail, proceed as follows:
1. Navigate to: Setup → Advanced setup → Communication → HART output
→ Configuration
2. Go to the System polling address parameter and set the HART slave address of the
device.
3. Use the following parameters to assign tank variables to the second to fourth HART
variable: Assign SV, Assign TV, Assign QV.
 The four HART variables are transmitted to a connected HART Master.
Special case: PV ≠ 4-20mA signal

In exceptional cases it might be required that the Primary Variable (PV) transmits a
different tank variable than the 4-20mA output. This is configured as follows.
1. Navigate to: Setup → Advanced setup → Communication → HART output
→ Configuration
2. Go to the PV source parameter and select Custom.
 The following additional parameters appear in the submenu: Assign PV, 0 %
value, 100 % value and PV mA selector.
3. Go to the Assign PV parameter and select the tank variable to be transmitted as the
Primary Variable (PV).
4. Use the 0 % value and 100 % value parameters to define a range for the PV. The
Percent of range parameter indicates the percentage for the actual value of the PV.
It is included in the cyclical output to the HART master.

PV
0% 2 100% [%]
A0032954
 69 Scaling of the tank variable to the percentage

A 0 % value
B 100 % value
1 Primary variable (PV)
2 Percent of range
5. Use the PV mA selector parameter to define whether the output current of an

Analog I/O module is to be included in the cyclical HART output.
122 Endress+Hauser
After startup of the device, as long as the assigned tank variable is not yet available,
the output current assumes the defined errror value.
The PV mA selector parameter does not influence the output current at the terminals
of the Analog I/O module. It only defines whether the value of this current is part of
the HART output or not.
9.5.14 Configuration of the Modbus output
D 1 2 3 4
1
E 2 D 1 2 3 4
1
CDI
C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
i D1-4
F 12 3
4
B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A 1 2 3 4
HR
on
POWER
WP A 1 2 3 4
SIM
A1-4
A0031200
 70 Possible locations of the Modbus modules (examples); depending on the device version these modules
may also be in slot B or C →  47.
The Proservo NMS8x acts as a Modbus slave. Measured or calculated tank values are
stored in registers which can be requested by a Modbus master.
The following submenu is used to configure the communication between the device and
the Modbus master:
Setup → Advanced setup → Communication → Modbus X1-4 →Configuration (→  233)
Endress+Hauser 123
9.5.15 Configuration of the V1 output
D 1 2 3 4
1
E 2 D 1 2 3 4
1
CDI
C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
i D1-4
F 12 3
4
B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A 1 2 3 4
HR
on
POWER
WP A 1 2 3 4
SIM
A1-4
A0031200
 71 Possible locations of the V1 modules (examples); depending on the device version these modules may also
be in slot B or C →  47.
The following submenus are used to configure the V1 communication between the device
and the control system:
• Setup → Advanced setup → Communication → V1 X1-4 → Configuration→  236
• Setup → Advanced setup → Communication → V1 X1-4 → V1 input selector→  239
9.5.16 Configuration of the WM550 output
D 1 2 3 4
1
E 2 D 1 2 3 4
1
CDI
C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
i D1-4
F 12 3
4
B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A 1 2 3 4
HR
on
POWER
WP A 1 2 3 4
SIM
A1-4
A0031200
 72 Possible locations of the WM550 modules (examples); depending on the device version these modules
may also be in slot B or C →  47.
The following submenus are used to configure the WM550 communication between the
device and the control system:
• Setup menu → Advanced setup submenu → Communication submenu → WM550 X1-4
→ Configuration submenu →  232
• Setup menu → Advanced setup submenu → Communication submenu → WM550 X1-4
→ WM550 input selector submenu →  241
124 Endress+Hauser
9.5.17 Configuration of the digital outputs
D 1 2 3 4
1
E 2 C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1
CDI
C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
i C1-2 C3-4
F 12 3
4
B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A 1 2 3 4
HR
on
POWER
WP A 1 2 3 4
SIM
A1-2 A3-4
A0026424
 73 Possible locations of the Digital I/O modules (examples); the order code defines the number and location
of Digital I/O modules →  47.
DIO
2/4
+
_
1/3
A0033029
 74 Usage of the Digital I/O module as a digital output
There is a Digital Xx-x submenu for each digital I/O module of the device. "X" designates
the slot in the terminal compartment, "x-x" the terminals within this slot. The most
important parameters of this submenu are Operating mode, Digital input source and
Contact type.
A digital output can be used to
• output the state of an alarm (if an alarm has been configured →  120)
• transmit the status of a digital input (if a digital input has been configured →  114)
To configure a digital output, proceed as follows:

1. Navigate to Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → Digital Xx-x, where Xx-x
designates the digital I/O module to be configured.
2. Go to the Operating mode parameter and select the Output passive option.
3. Go to the Digital input source parameter and select the alarm or digital input to be
transmitted.
4. Go to the Contact type parameter and select how the internal state of the alarm or
digital input is to be mapped to the digital output (see table below).
Endress+Hauser 125
• State of the alarm Switching state of the digital output

• Internal state of the digital input
Contact type = Normally open Contact type = Normally closed
Inactive Open Closed
Active Closed Open
• For SIL applications, Contact type is automatically set to Normally closed by the
device when starting the SIL confirmation procedure.
• In case of a power supply failure, the switching state is always "open", irrespectiv of
the selected option.
• The Digital Xx-x submenu contains additional parameters for a more detailed
configuration of the Digital Input. For a description refer to →  223.
9.6 Advanced settings

For a more detailed configuration of the signal inputs, the tank calculations and the signal
outputs refer to the Advanced setup submenu (→  199).
9.7 Simulation
To check the correct configuration of the device and of the control system, it is possible to
simulate different situations (measured values, diagnostic messages etc.). See the
Simulation submenu (→  327) for details.
9.8 Protecting settings from unauthorized access

There are two possibilities to protect the settings from unauthorized access:
• By an access code (→  77)
This locks the access via the display and operating module.
• By the protection switch (→  78)
This locks the access to W&M-related parameters by any user interface (display and
operating module, FieldCare, other configuration tools).
126 Endress+Hauser
Proservo NMS81 Operation
10 Operation
10.1 Reading off the device locking status

Depending on the locking state of the device some operations may be locked. The current
locking status is indicated at: Setup → Advanced setup → Locking status. The following
table summarizes the different locking statuses:
Locking status Meaning Unlocking procedure
Hardware locked The device is locked by the write-protection switch in the →  78

terminal compartment.
SIL locked The device is in SIL-locked mode. See the SIL Safety
manual
CT active - all The custody transfer mode is active. →  78

parameters
WHG locked (in The device is in WHG-locked mode. in preparation

preparation)
Temporarily locked Write access to the parameters is temporarily lock due to Wait for completion of
device-internal processing (e.g. data upload/download, the device-internal
reset). Once the internal processing has been completed, processing.
the parameters can be changed again.
A locking is indicated by the write protection symbol in the header of the display:
XXXXXXXXX
20.50
XX XX
A0015870
10.2 Reading off measured values

Tank values can be read off in the following submenus:
• Operation → Level
• Operation → Temperature
• Operation → Density
• Operation → Pressure
Endress+Hauser 127
Operation Proservo NMS81
10.3 Gauge commands
10.3.1 Overview of available device functions

Gauge commands are mainly divided into two categories.
• Continuous gauge command
• One-time gauge command (non-continuous)
One-time gauge commands have a defined end state. After a one-time gauge
command is completed, another gauge command is executed which is defined by the
Post gauge command parameter. If Post gauge command is set to None, the
operation will stop.
The gauge command can be chosen by navigating to Operation → Gauge command. The
status of the gauge command execution is shown in the Gauge status parameter. The
gauge status is displayed on the home screen by default.
2 XXXXXXXXX F 3
# 4841.00 4
5 mm
Level bal. 6
7
8
A0028702
 75 Typical appearance of the standard view (measured value display)

1 Display module
2 Device tag
3 Status area
4 Display area for measured values
5 Display area for measured value and status symbols
6 Gauge status indication
7 Gauge status symbol
8 Measured value status symbol
For details of status symbols →  68

When a one-time gauge command is executed, additional information is shown in the
One-time command status parameter in the operation menu.
128 Endress+Hauser
10.3.2 Descriptions of gauge commands

The following table shows the available gauge commands and functions of NMS8x.
The numbers in the figures show the sequence of displacer movement.
Gauge Post gauge

Descriptions
command command
Stop Displacer stops. Not available
Level The displacer searches for the liquid level Not available
surface and balances there.
Up The displacer moves up to the reference Not available

position. R
R Reference position
Bottom level The displacer searches for the tank bottom. Customer
After determining the bottom value, the setting value
post gauge command is executed.
Upper I/F The displacer searches for the upper Not available
level interface level and balances there.
Lower I/F The displacer searches for the lower Not available
level interface level and balances there.
Upper density NMS8x performs a spot density Customer

measurement in the upper phase of the 3 setting value
1 4
tank. After completing the measurement,
a
2
the post gauge command is executed.
a Immersion depth
Endress+Hauser 129
Gauge Post gauge

Descriptions
command command
Middle NMS8x performs a spot density Customer

density measurement in the middle phase of the 3 setting value
4
tank. After completing the measurement,
the post gauge command is executed.
1
a
2
a Immersion depth
Lower density NMS8x performs a spot density Customer

measurement in the lower phase of the 3 setting value
4
tank. After completing measurement, the
post gauge command is executed.
1
a
2
a Immersion depth
Repeatability The displacer is taken out of the liquid. Level

After that, the displacer returns to the level 2
1 3
measurement. This can be used for a
function check.
 executed
This gauge command should only be
if the current gauge
command is level.
Water dip The displacer searches for the upper Customer

interface level. After balancing on the 1 3 setting value
liquid, the post gauge command is executed. 2
Release When the displacer hits any obstacle in the Stop

overtension tank and gets stuck (Error message:
Overtension) this command will release the
tension on the wire by moving down a short
distance.
 During an overtension error, no other

gauge command will be executed.
Tank profile Density profile measurement of the tank Customer

(tank bottom to level) 2 setting value
1 7
6
5
3 4
Interface Density profile measurement of the upper Customer

profile interface (upper I/F level to level) 1 2 5 setting value
4
3
130 Endress+Hauser
Gauge Post gauge

Descriptions
command command
Manual Density profile measurement from a Customer

profile manually set position to level 12 6 setting value
5
4
3
Level standby The displacer moves to a set position and Level

stays there until the tank level reaches this
position. After that, gauge command is
changed back to level.
 This function can be used when

supplying or discharging liquid.
Endress+Hauser 131
10.3.3 Sources for gauge commands

Gauge commands can be sent via various sources.
• Displays or CDI (e.g. FieldCare)
• Digital input (e.g. control switch)
• Fieldbus (Modbus, V1, HART)
The last received gauge command via any sources will be executed as usual.
During calibration, gauge commands are not accepted from any sources.
XX
XX
XX
XX
X
mm
2 3
NXA820
INST
STOP LIFT
OFF
A0029538
1 Display operation
2 Digital input (e.g. control switch)
3 Tankvision
Gauge command priorities

The priority of the gauge command for NMS8x is very simple. The last received gauge
command via any sources will be executed to take of the former gauge command. However
the priority varies depending on the devices. When replacing the device with the NMS8x,
check the priorities shown below.
NOTICE
Undesired gauge command will be executed.
If the setting is not changed, an undesired gauge command will be executed (e.g. Level
command via Fieldbus would overwrite Stop command for maintenance.).
‣ If the system has been automatically or semi-automatically programmed for operation,
maintenance or other purposes, the setting should be changed corresponding to use.
Proservo NMS8x
By display From digital input From Fieldbus
Command Priority Command Priority Command Priority
Level 1 Level 1 Level 1
Interface 1 Interface 1 Interface 1
Tank bottom 1 Tank bottom 1 Tank bottom 1
132 Endress+Hauser
By display From digital input From Fieldbus
Spot density 1 Spot density 1 Spot density 1
Profile density 1 Profile density 1 Profile density 1
Up 1 Up 1 Up 1
Stop 1 Stop 1 Stop 1
Proservo NMS5/NMS7
By display From NRF560 From digital input From Fieldbus
Command Priority Command Priority Command Priority Command Priority
Level 4 Level 4 Level 4 Level 4
Interface 2 Interface 3 Interface 1 Interface 4
Tank bottom 2 Tank bottom 3 N/A N/A Tank bottom 4
Spot density 2 Spot density 3 N/A N/A Spot density 4
Profile density 2 Profile density 3 N/A N/A Profile density 4
Up 2 Up 3 Up 1 Up 4
Stop 2 Stop 3 Stop 1 Stop 4
Servo level gauge TGM5
By display From NRF560 From DRM9700 From digital input From Fieldbus
Command Priority Command Priority Command Priority Command Priority Command Priority
Level 4 Level 4 Level 4 Level 4 Level 4
Interface 2 Interface 3 N/A N/A N/A N/A Interface 4
Tank 2 Tank 3 N/A N/A N/A N/A Tank 4

bottom bottom bottom
Spot density 2 Spot density 3 N/A N/A N/A N/A Spot density 4
Profile 2 Profile 3 N/A N/A N/A N/A Profile 4

density density density
Up 2 Up 3 Up 1 Up 1 Up 4
Stop 2 Stop 3 N/A N/A Stop 1 Stop 4
Servo level gauge TGM4000
By display From DRM9700 From digital input From Fieldbus
Command Priority Command Priority Command Priority Command Priority
Level 4 Level 4 Level 4 Level 4
Interface 2 Interface 1 N/A N/A Interface 4
Tank bottom 2 N/A N/A N/A N/A Tank bottom 4
Spot density 2 N/A N/A N/A N/A Spot density 4
Profile density 2 N/A N/A N/A N/A Profile density 4
Up 2 Up 1 Up 1 Up 4
Stop 2 Stop N/A Stop 1 Stop 4
Endress+Hauser 133
Diagnostics and troubleshooting Proservo NMS81
11 Diagnostics and troubleshooting
11.1 General trouble shooting
11.1.1 General errors
Error Possible cause Remedial action
Device does not respond. Supply voltage not connected. Connect the correct voltage.
The cables do not contact the Ensure electrical contact between the
terminals properly. cable and the terminal.
Values on the display The plug of the display cable is not Connect the plug correctly.
invisible connected correctly.
Display is defective. Replace display.
Display contrast too low. Set Setup → Advanced setup → Display

→ Contrast display to a value ≥ 60 %.
"Communication error" is Electromagnetic interference Check grounding of the device.

indicated on the display when
starting the device or Broken display cable or display plug. Exchange display.
connecting the display
CDI communication does not Wrong setting of the COM port on Check the setting of the COM port on
work. the computer. the computer (e.g. FieldCare) and
change it if necessary.
Device measures incorrectly. Parametrization error Check and adjust parameterization.
11.1.2 Measurement specific errors
Error Possible case Remedy
Displacer not balancing No water in the tank
Liquid surface unstable Change Process condition.
Incorrect density setting Check density setting.
Displacer not traveling to High stop level Check gauge status.

reference position
Over tension Check gauge status ans gauge command.
 The function, Release overtension,

can only be performed.
Displacer not measuring the Low stop level Check gauge status.
bottom level
Under tension Check gauge status.
Bottom detection weight wrong Check Bottom detection weight in Service

mode.
Gauge status not working under Those setting of Upper, Middle, Upper density < Middle density < Lower
the following levels. and Lower density are set to density
same value. The difference of value 0.2 g/ml or more
• Upper/lower interface
is required for setting as follows.
• Middle/lower density
<e.g>
• IF (Interface) profile
• Water dip • 0.8 g/ml
• 1.0 g/ml
• 1.2 g/ml
After turning on the power, the Digital input gauge status is Check the Digital input mapping.
previous gauge command is not effective.
effective.
134 Endress+Hauser
Proservo NMS81 Diagnostics and troubleshooting
Error Possible case Remedy
Invalid level setting Gauge command of Balanced is Check the gauge command and set level
not valid when Set level was again.
issued.
Invalid liquid temperature Incorrect liquid temperature Check Liquid temp source.
source
HART device disconnected Check HART device
Invalid vapor temperature Incorrect liquid temperature Check Liquid temp source.
source
Invalid liquid level Incorrect water level source Check Water level source
Status is not SIL mode The status of Gauge command Check gauge command is on Level.
is not on Level mode.
Incorrect AIO parameter setting Check the Operating mode, 4 to 20 mA

output
Check the Use for SIL is valid.
Incorrect DIO parameter setting Check the Operating mode, Output

passive.
Check the Contact type is Normally

closed.
Check the Use for SIL is valid.
Endress+Hauser 135
11.2 Diagnostic information on local display
11.2.1 Diagnostic message

Faults detected by the self-monitoring system of the measuring device are displayed as a
diagnostic message in alternation with the measured value display.
Measured value display in alarm condition Diagnostic message
2 1
XXXXXXXXX S XXXXXXXXX S
20.50 S801
Supply voltage
3
4
X XX i Menu
5
A0013939-EN
1 Status signal
2 Status symbol (symbol for event level)
3 Status symbol with diagnostics event
4 Event text
5 Operating elements
Status signals
"Failure"
A device error is present. The measured value is no longer valid.
A0013956
"Function check"
The device is in service mode (e.g. during a simulation or a warning).
A0013959
"Out of specification"
The device is operated:
• Outside of its technical specifications (e.g. during startup or a cleaning)
A0013958
• Outside of the configuration carried out by the user (e.g. level outside configured span)
"Maintenance required"
A0013957
Status symbol (symbol for event level)
"Alarm" status
The measurement is interrupted. The signal outputs take on the defined alarm condition.
A0013961 A diagnostic message is generated.
"Warning" status
The device continues to measure. A diagnostic message is generated.
A0013962
136 Endress+Hauser
Diagnostics event and event text

The fault can be identified using the diagnostics event. The event text helps you by
providing information about the fault. In addition, the corresponding symbol is displayed
before the diagnostics event.
Diagnostics event
Status symbol Status signal Event number Event text
↓ ↓ ↓
Example 441 Curr.output 1

A0013962 A0013956
3-digit number
If two or more diagnostic messages are pending simultaneously, only the message with the
highest priority is shown. Additional pending diagnostic messages can be shown in
Diagnostic list submenu (→  323).
Operating elements
Operating functions in menu, submenu
Plus key
Opens the message about the remedial measures.
A0013970
Enter key
Opens the operating menu.
A0013952
Endress+Hauser 137
11.2.2 Calling up remedial measures
XXXXXXXXX S XXXXXXXXX S
20.50 S801
Supply voltage
X XX i Menu
1.
Diagnostic list S
Diagnostics 1
1 S801 Supply voltage
Diagnostics 2
Diagnostics 3
2.
2 Supply voltage (ID:203) 3

4 S801
5 YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS
6 Increase supply voltage
3.
A0032957-EN
 76 Message for remedial measures

1 Diagnostic information
2 Short text
3 Service ID
4 Diagnostic behavior with diagnostic code
5 Operation time of occurrence
6 Remedial measures
A diagnostic message appears in the standard view (measured value display).

1. Press  ( symbol).
 The Diagnostic list submenu opens.
2. Select the desired diagnostic event with  or  and press  .
 The message for the remedial measures for the selected diagnostic event opens.
3. Press  +  simultaneously.
 The message for the remedial measures closes.
The user is in the Diagnostics menu at an entry for a diagnostics event, e.g. in the
Diagnostic list submenu or in the Previous diagnostics.
1. Press .
 The message for the remedial measures closes.
138 Endress+Hauser
11.3 Diagnostic information in FieldCare

Any faults detected by the measuring device are displayed on the home page of the
operating tool once the connection has been established.
Xxxxxx/…/…/
Device name: Xxxxxxx Mass flow: 12.34 kg/h
Device tag: Xxxxxxx Volume flow: 12.34 m³/h
Status signal: Function check (C)
Xxxxxx
P Diagnostics 1: C485 Simu...
P Remedy information: Deactivate...
P Access status tooling: Mainenance Failure (F)
+ Operation Function check (C) 2

+ Setup Diagnostics 1: C485 Simulation measured vari...
+ Diagnostics Remedy information: Deactivate Simulation (Service...
+ Expert
Out of spezification (S) 3
Maintenance required (M)
A0021799-EN
1 Status area with status signal

2 Diagnostic information
3 Remedial measures with Service ID
Furthermore, diagnostic events that have occurred can be viewed in the Diagnostic
list submenu.
11.3.1 Status signals

The status signals provide information on the state and reliability of the device by
categorizing the cause of the diagnostic information (diagnostic event).
Symbol Meaning
Failure
A device error has occurred. The measured value is no longer valid.
A0017271
Function check
The device is in service mode (e.g. during a simulation or a warning).
A0017278
Out of specification
The device is operated outside its technical specification limits (e.g. outside the process
A0017277 temperature range)
Maintenance required
A0017276
The status signals are categorized in accordance with VDI/VDE 2650 and NAMUR
Recommendation NE 107.
Endress+Hauser 139
11.3.2 Calling up remedy information

Remedy information is provided for every diagnostic event to ensure that problems can be
rectified quickly:
• On the home page
Remedy information is displayed in a separate field below the diagnostics information.
• In the Diagnostics menu
Remedy information can be called up in the working area of the user interface.
The user is in the Diagnostics menu.

1. Call up the desired parameter.
2. On the right in the working area, mouse over the parameter.
 A tool tip with remedy information for the diagnostic event appears.
140 Endress+Hauser
11.4 Overview of the diagnostic messages

Diagnostic Short text Remedy instructions Status Diagnostic
number signal behavior
[from the [from the
factory] factory]
Diagnostic of sensor
102 Sensor incompatible error 1. Restart device F Alarm

2. Contact service
150 Detector error 1. Restart device F Alarm

2. Check electrical connections
of detector
3. Replace detector unit
151 Sensor electronic failure Replace sensor electronic F Alarm

module
Diagnostic of electronic
242 Software incompatible 1. Check software F Alarm

2. Flash or change main
electronics module
252 Modules incompatible 1. Check if correct electronic F Alarm

modul is plugged
2. Replace electronic module
261 Electronic modules 1. Restart device F Alarm

2. Check electronic modules
3. Change I/O Modul or main
electronics
262 Module connection 1. Check module connections F Alarm

2. Change electronic modules
270 Main electronic failure Replace main electronics F Alarm
271 Main electronic failure 1. Restart device F Alarm

2. Change main electronic
module
272 Main electronic failure Restart device F Alarm
272 Main electronic failure 1. Restart device F Alarm

2. Contact service
273 Main electronic failure 1. Emergency operation via F Alarm

display
2. Change main electronics
275 I/O module failure 1. Restart device F Alarm

2. Change I/O module
276 I/O module faulty 1. Restart device F Alarm

282 Data storage 1. Restart device F Alarm

2. Contact service
283 Memory content 1. Transfer data or reset device F Alarm

2. Contact service
284 Detector SW update in Firmware update active, please F Alarm

progress wait!
311 Electronic failure Maintenance required! M Warning

1. Do not perform reset
2. Contact service
333 System recovery required HW change detected F Alarm

System configuration recovery
required
Go to menu on device and
perform recovery
Endress+Hauser 141

[from the [from the
factory] factory]
334 System recovery failure HW changed, system recovery F Alarm

failure. Return to factory
381 Displacer distance invalid 1. Calibrate sensor F Alarm

2. Restart device
3. Replace sensor electronics
382 Sensor communication 1. Check connection of sensor F Alarm

electronics
2. Restart device
3. Replace sensor electronics
Diagnostic of configuration
400 AIO simulation output Deactivate simulation AIO C Warning

output
401 DIO simulation output Deactivate simulation DIO C Warning

output
403 Calibration AIO 1. Restart device F Alarm

404 Calibration AIP 1. Restart device F Alarm

405 COMM timeout DIO 1 to 8 1. Check wiring F Alarm

406 IOM offline 1. Check wiring F Alarm

407 COMM timeout AIO 1 to 2 1. Check wiring F Alarm

408 Invalid range AIO 1 to 2 1. Check device configuration. C Warning

2. Check wiring.
409 RTD temp out of range 1 to 2 1. Check electronic modules C Warning

2. Change I/O or main electronic
module
410 Data transfer 1. Check connection F Alarm

2. Retry data transfer
411 Hart device 1 to 15 has 1. Check HART device F Alarm 1)

malfunction 2. Change HART device
412 Processing download Download active, please wait C Warning
413 NMT 1 to 15: element is 1. Check NMT wiring C Warning

open or short connection
2. Replace NMT
415 Hart device 1 to 15 offline 1. Check HART device C Warning

2. Change HART device
434 Real time clock defective Replace main electronics C Warning
436 Date/Time incorrect Check date and time settings. M Warning
437 Configuration incompatible 1. Restart device F Alarm

2. Contact service
438 Dataset 1. Check data set file M Warning

2. Check device configuration
3. Up- and download new
configuration
441 AIO 1 to 2 current output 1. Check process F Alarm

alarm 2. Check current output settings
442 AIO 1 to 2 current output 1. Check process C Warning

warning 2. Check current output settings
142 Endress+Hauser

[from the [from the
factory] factory]
443 AIO 1 to 2 Input not HART Change PV source or AIO input C Warning
compatible source.
484 Failure mode simulation Deactivate simulation C Alarm
495 Diagnostic event simulation Deactivate simulation C Warning
500 AIO C1-3 source no longer Change input source C Warning

valid
501 Level source no longer valid Change input source C Warning
502 GP1 source no longer valid Change input source C Warning
506 Water level source no longer Change input source C Warning

valid
507 Liquid temp source no longer Change input source C Warning

valid
508 Vapor temperatur source no Change input source C Warning

longer valid
509 Air temperature source no Change input source C Warning

longer valid
510 P1 source no longer valid Change input source C Warning
513 Upper density source no Change input source C Warning

longer valid
514 Middle density source no Change input source C Warning

longer valid
515 Lower density source no Change input source C Warning

longer valid
516 Gauge command source no Change input source C Warning

longer valid
517 Gauge status source no Change input source C Warning

longer valid
518 Average density source no Change input source C Warning

longer valid
519 Upper interface source no Change input source C Warning

longer valid
520 Lower interface source no Change input source C Warning

longer valid
521 Bottom level source no Change input source C Warning

longer valid
522 Displacer position source not Change input source C Warning

valid
523 Distance source no longer Change input source C Warning

valid
524 Balance flag source no longer Change input source C Warning

valid
525 One time cmd source no Change input source C Warning

longer valid
Endress+Hauser 143

[from the [from the
factory] factory]
526 Alarm 1 to 4 source no Change input source C Warning

longer valid
527 AIO B1-3 source no longer Change input source C Warning

valid
528 CTSh 1. Check device configuration. C Warning

2. Check wiring.
529 HTG 1. Check device configuration. C Warning

2. Check wiring.
530 HTMS 1. Check device configuration. C Warning

2. Check wiring.
531 HyTD correction value 1. Check device configuration. C Warning

2. Check wiring.
532 HART output: PV source not Change input source C Warning

valid
533 HART output: SV source not Change input source C Warning

valid
534 HART output: QV source not Change input source C Warning

valid
535 HART output: TV source not Change input source C Warning

valid
536 Display: source no longer Change input source C Warning

valid
537 Trend: source no longer valid Change input source C Warning
538 HART output: PV mA source Change input source C Warning

not valid
539 Modbus 1-4 SP source invalid Set valid SP input selector C Warning
540 V1 1-4 SP source invalid Set valid SP input selector C Warning
541 Modbus 1-4 alarm source Set valid alarm input selector C Warning
invalid
542 V1 1-4 alarm source invalid Set valid alarm input selector C Warning
543 Modbus 1-4 analog source Set valid analog input selector C Warning
invalid
544 V1 1-4 analog source invalid Set valid analog input selector C Warning
545 Modbus 1-4 user value Set valid user value input C Warning
source invalid selector
546 Modbus 1-4 discrete value Set valid user discrete input C Warning
source invalid selector
547 V1 1-4 user value source Set valid user value input C Warning
invalid selector
548 V1 1-4 discrete value source Set valid user discrete input C Warning
invalid selector
549 Modbus 1-4 percent source Set valid percentage input C Warning
invalid selector
550 V1 1-4 percent source invalid Set valid percentage input C Warning
selector
560 Calibration mandatory 1. Carry out weight calibration C Alarm

2. Carry out reference
calibration
3. Carry out drum calibration
144 Endress+Hauser

[from the [from the
factory] factory]
564 DIO B1-2 source no longer Change input source C Warning

valid
565 DIO B3-4 source not valid Change input source C Warning
566 DIO C1-2 source no longer Change input source C Warning

valid
567 DIO C3-4 source no longer Change input source C Warning

valid
568 DIO D1-2 source no longer Change input source C Warning

valid
569 DIO D3-4 source no longer Change input source C Warning

valid
585 Simulation distance Deactivate simulation C Warning
586 Record map Recording of mapping C Warning

please wait
598 DIO A1-2 source no longer Change input source C Warning

valid
599 DIO A3-4 source no longer Change input source C Warning

valid
Diagnostic of process
801 Energy too low Increase supply voltage S Warning
803 Current loop 1. Check device configuration. F Alarm

2. Check wiring.
803 Current loop 1 to 2 M Warning
803 Current loop C Warning
825 System temperature 1. Check ambient temperature S Warning

2. Check process temperature
825 System temperature F Alarm
826 Sensor temperature 1. Check ambient temperature S Warning

2. Check process temperature
826 Sensor temperature F Alarm
844 Process value out of 1. Check process value S Alarm 1)

specification 2. Check application
3. Check sensor
844 Process value out of S Warning
specification
903 Current loop 1 to 2 1. Check device configuration. F Alarm

2. Check wiring.
904 Digital output 1 to 8 1. Check device configuration. F Alarm

2. Check wiring.
941 Echo lost 1. Check process value S Warning

2. Check application
3. Check sensor
942 In safety distance 1. Check level S Warning

2. Check safety distance
3. Reset self holding
943 In blocking distance Reduced accuracy S Warning

Check level
950 Advanced diagnostics Maintain your diagnostic event M Warning
961 Alarm 1 to 4 HighHigh 1. Check alarm source C Warning

2. Check configuration settings
962 Alarm 1 to 4 High 1. Check alarm source C Warning

Endress+Hauser 145

[from the [from the
factory] factory]
963 Alarm 1 to 4 Low 1. Check alarm source C Warning

964 Alarm 1 to 4 LowLow 1. Check alarm source C Warning

965 Alarm 1 to 4 HighHigh 1. Check alarm source F Alarm

966 Alarm 1 to 4 High 1. Check alarm source F Alarm

967 Alarm 1 to 4 Low 1. Check alarm source F Alarm

968 Alarm 1 to 4 LowLow 1. Check alarm source F Alarm

970 Overtension 1. Check displacer and process C Alarm

conditions
2. Release overtension
971 Undertension Check displacer and process. C Alarm
1) Diagnostic behavior can be changed.
The parameters No.941, 942, and 943 are only used for NMR8x and NRF81.
146 Endress+Hauser
11.5 Diagnostic list

In the Diagnostic list submenu, up to 5 currently pending diagnostic messages can be
displayed. If more than 5 messages are pending, the messages with the highest priority are
shown on the display.
Navigation path
Diagnostics → Diagnostic list
Calling up and closing the remedial measures

1. Press .
 The message about the remedial measures closes.
11.6 Reset measuring device

To reset the device to a defined state use the Device reset parameter (→  318).
11.7 Device information

Information on the device (order code, hardware and software version of the individual
modules etc.) can be found in the Device information submenu (→  324).
11.8 Firmware history

Date Software Modifications Documentation (NMS81)
version
Operating Instructions Description of Parameters Technical Information
04.2016 01.00.zz Original software BA01459G/00/EN/01.16 GP01077G/00/EN/01.16 TI01249G/00/EN/01.16
12.2016 01.02.zz Bugfixes and improvements BA01459G/00/EN/02.17 GP01077G/00/EN/01.17 TI01249G/00/EN/02.17
07.2018 01.03.zz Software update BA01459G/00/EN/04.18 GP01077G/00/EN/02.18 TI01249G/00/EN/04.18
Endress+Hauser 147
Maintenance Proservo NMS81
12 Maintenance
12.1 Maintenance tasks

No special maintenance work is required.
12.1.1 Exterior cleaning

When cleaning the exterior of measuring devices, always use cleaning agents that do not
attack the surface of the housing or the seals.
12.2 Endress+Hauser services

Endress+Hauser offers a wide variety of services for maintenance such as recalibration,
maintenance service or device tests.
Your Endress+Hauser Sales Center can provide detailed information on the services.
148 Endress+Hauser
Proservo NMS81 Repair
13 Repair
13.1 General information on repairs
13.1.1 Repair concept

The Endress+Hauser repair concept assumes that the devices have a modular design and
that repairs can be done by the Endress+Hauser service or specially trained customers.
Spare parts are contained in suitable kits. They contain the related replacement
instructions.
For more information on service and spare parts, contact the Service Department at
Endress+Hauser.
13.1.2 Repairs to Ex-approved devices

When carrying out repairs to Ex-approved devices, please note the following:
• Repairs to Ex-approved devices may only be carried out by trained personnel or by the
Endress+Hauser Service.
• Comply with the prevailing standards, national Ex-area regulations, safety instructions
(XA) and certificates.
• Only use original spare parts from Endress+Hauser.
• When ordering a spare part, please note the device designation on the nameplate. Only
replace parts with identical parts.
• Carry out repairs according to the instructions. On completion of repairs, carry out the
specified routine test on the device.
• Only Endress+Hauser Service may convert a certified device into a different certified
variant.
• Document all repair work and conversions.
13.1.3 Replacement of a device or electronic module

After a complete device or the electronic mainboard has been replaced, the parameters can
be downloaded into the instrument again via FieldCare.
Condition: The configuration of the old device has been saved to the computer via
FieldCare.
If an electronic module of the sensor or other parts of the sensor have been replaced,
the servo calibration must be repeated. Please refer to →  87.
following setting:
Endress+Hauser 149
Repair Proservo NMS81
13.2 Spare parts

Some interchangeable measuring device components are listed on an overview sign in the
connection compartment cover.
The spare part overview sign contains the following information:
• A list of the most important spare parts for the measuring device, including their
ordering information.
• The URL for the W@M Device Viewer (www.endress.com/deviceviewer):
All the spare parts for the measuring device, along with the order code, are listed here
and can be ordered. If available, users can also download the associated Installation
Instructions.
13.3 Endress+Hauser services

Endress+Hauser offers a wide range of services.
Your Endress+Hauser Sales Center can provide detailed information on the services.
13.4 Return
The requirements for safe device return can vary depending on the device type and
national legislation.
1. Refer to the website for more information:
http://www.endress.com/support/return-material
2. Return the device if repairs or a factory calibration are required, or if the wrong
device was ordered or delivered.
13.5 Disposal
Observe the following notes during disposal:
• Observe valid federal/national regulations.
• Ensure proper separation and reuse of the device components.
150 Endress+Hauser
Proservo NMS81 Accessories
14 Accessories
14.1 Device-specific accessories
14.1.1 Weather protection cover
471.6 (18.6)
319 (12.6)
32.5 (1.28)
56.1 (2.21)
A0033572
 77 Weather protection cover; dimensions: mm (in)
Materials
• Protection cover and mounting brackets
Material
316L (1.4404)
• Screws and washers
Material
A4
• The weather protection cover can be ordered together with the device:
Ordering feature 620 "Accessory Enclosed", option PA "Weather Protection Cover")
• It can also be ordered as an accessory:
Order code: 71305035 (for NMS8x)
Endress+Hauser 151
Accessories Proservo NMS81
14.1.2 Calibration chamber

A calibration chamber is recommended for use with tank level gauges in order to allow
maintenance (removing the 70 mm (2.76 in) displacer or larger), while the tank is in
service. Contact your Endress+Hauser Sales Center if necessary.
14.1.3 Ball valve

Ball valves are recommended for use with tank level gauges in order to allow maintenance
such as removing displacers while tank is in service. Contact your Endress+Hauser Sales
Center if necessary.
14.1.4 Control switch

A control switch is used for field mounted tank gauges. This provides additional gauge
operation contact switching in order to control the gauge’s operation, such as hoisting up
the displacer. Contact your Endress+Hauser Sales Center if necessary.
14.1.5 Relief valve and pressure gauge

A relief valve is used to release pressure inside the housing of NMS8x before maintenance.
A0028881
 78 Relief valve
A pressure gauge is used to check process pressure inside the housing.
A0028882
 79 Pressure gauge
152 Endress+Hauser
A0029103
 80 Mounting position of relief valve and pressure gauge

1 Pressure gauge
2 Relief valve
14.1.6 Cleaning nozzle and gas purging nozzle

A cleaning nozzle used for washing inside housing is especially recommended for F&B or
alcohol applications.
A gas purging nozzle used for purging gas inside the housing is especially recommended
for a nitrogen blanket for petrochemical or chemical applications.
A0028883
 81 Holes for cleaning nozzle and gas purging nozzle

1 Cleaning nozzle
2 Gas purging nozzle
Endress+Hauser 153
Accessories Proservo NMS81
14.2 Communication-specific accessories

WirelessHART adapter SWA70
• Is used for the wireless connection of field devices
• The WirelessHART adapter can be easily integrated into field devices and existing
infrastructures, offers data protection and transmission safety and can be operated in
parallel with other wireless networks
For details, see Operating Instructions BA00061S
Gauge Emulator, Modbus to BPM

• Using the protocol converter, it is possible to integrate a field device into a host system
even if the field device does not know the communication protocol of the host system.
Eliminates vendor lock-in for field devices.
• Field communication protocol (field device): Modbus RS485
• Host communication protocol (host system): Enraf BPM
• 1 measuring device per Gauge Emulator
• Separate power supply: 100 to 240 VAC, 50 to 60 Hz, 0.375 A, 15 W
• Several approvals for the hazardous area
Gauge Emulator, Modbus to TRL/2
• Using the protocol converter, it is possible to integrate a field device into a host system
even if the field device does not know the communication protocol of the host system.
Eliminates vendor lock-in for field devices.
• Field communication protocol (field device): Modbus RS485
• Host communication protocol (host system): Saab TRL/2
• 1 measuring device per Gauge Emulator
• Separate power supply: 100 to 240 VAC, 50 to 60 Hz, 0.375 A, 15 W
• Several approvals for the hazardous area
14.3 Service-specific accessories

Accessory Description
Commubox FXA195 For intrinsically safe HART communication with FieldCare via the USB interface.
HART
 For details refer to Technical Information TI00404F
Commubox FXA291 Connects Endress+Hauser field devices with CDI interface (= Endress+Hauser
Common Data Interface) to the USB interface of a computer.
Order code: 51516983
 For details refer to Technical Information TI00405C
154 Endress+Hauser
DeviceCare SFE100 Configuration tool for HART, PROFIBUS and FOUNDATION Fieldbus devices
 Technical Information TI01134S

 • DeviceCare is available for download at
www.software-products.endress.com. The download requires a
registration in the Endress+Hauser software portal.
• Alternatively, a DeviceCare DVD can be ordered with the device. Product
structure: Feature 570 "Service", Option IV "Tooling DVD (DeviceCare
Setup)".
FieldCare SFE500 Endress+Hauser's FDT-based Plant Asset Management tool.

Helps to configure and maintain all field devices of your plant. By supplying status
information it also supports the diagnosis of the devices.
 Technical Information TI00028S
14.4 System components

RIA15 Compact process display unit with very low voltage drop for universal use to display
4 to 20 mA/HART signals
 For details refer to Technical Information TI01043K.

Tankvision Inventory Management System with completely integrated software for operation
• Tank Scanner NXA820 via standard web browser
• Data Concentrator
NXA821  For details refer to Technical Information TI00419G.
• Host Link NXA822
Endress+Hauser 155
Operating menu Proservo NMS81
15 Operating menu
• : Navigation path for operating module at the device
• : Navigation path for operating tool (e.g. FieldCare)
• : Parameter can be locked via software locking
15.1 Overview of the operating menu

• This section lists the parameters of the following menus:
• Operation (→  167)
• Setup (→  184)
• Diagnostics (→  320)
• For the Expert menu refer to the "Description of Device Parameters" (GP) of the
respective device.
• Depending on the device version and parametrization some parameters will not be
available in a given situation. For details refer to the "Prerequisite" category in the
description of the respective parameter.
• The representation essentially corresponds to the menu in an operating tool (e.g.
FieldCare). On the local display there may be minor differences in the menu
structure. Details are mentioned in the description of the respective submenu.
Navigation  Operating tool
Operation →  167
Gauge command →  167
Distance →  168
Net weight →  168
Gauge status →  169
Balance flag →  169
Standby level →  169
One-time command status →  170
‣ Level →  171
Tank level →  171
Tank Level % →  171
Tank ullage →  171
Tank ullage % →  171
Upper interface level →  172
Upper interface level timestamp →  172
156 Endress+Hauser
Proservo NMS81 Operating menu
Lower interface level →  172
Lower interface level timestamp →  172
Bottom level →  173
Bottom level timestamp →  173
Water level →  173
Measured level →  173
Displacer position →  174
‣ Temperature →  174
Air temperature →  174
Liquid temperature →  174
Vapor temperature →  175
‣ NMT element values →  175
‣ Element temperature →  175
Element temperature 1 to 24 →  175
‣ Element position →  176
Element position 1 to 24 →  176
‣ Density →  176
Observed density →  176
Vapor density →  176
Air density →  177
Measured upper density →  177
Upper density timestamp →  177
Measured middle density →  177
Middle Density Timestamp →  178
Endress+Hauser 157
Measured lower density →  178
Lower density timestamp →  178
Profile point →  178
Profile average density →  179
Profile density timestamp →  179
‣ Profile density →  180
Profile density 0 to 49 →  180
Profile density position 0 to 49 →  180
‣ Pressure →  180
P1 (bottom) →  180
P3 (top) →  181
‣ GP values →  182
GP 1 to 4 name →  182
GP Value 1 →  182
GP Value 2 →  182
GP Value 3 →  182
GP Value 4 →  183
 Setup →  184
Device tag →  184
Units preset →  184
Upper density →  185
Middle density →  185
Lower density →  185
Gauge command →  167
Process condition →  186
158 Endress+Hauser
Empty →  187
Tank reference height →  187
Tank level →  171
Set level →  188
Level source →  188
High stop level →  188
Low stop level →  189
Liquid temp source →  189
‣ Calibration →  191
‣ Move displacer →  191
Move distance →  191
Move displacer →  191
Motor status →  192
Move displacer →  192
‣ Sensor calibration →  193
Sensor calibration →  193
Offset weight →  193
Span weight →  193
Zero calibration →  194
Calibration status →  194
Offset calibration →  194
Span calibration →  194
Endress+Hauser 159
‣ Reference calibration →  195
Reference calibration →  195
Reference position →  195
Progress →  195
‣ Drum calibration →  197
Drum calibration →  197
Set high weight →  197
Make drum table →  197
Drum table point →  197
Make low table →  198
Set low weight →  198
‣ Advanced setup →  199
Locking status →  199
Access status tooling →  199
Enter access code →  199
‣ Input/output →  200
‣ HART devices →  200
Number of devices →  200
‣ HART Device(s) →  201
‣ Forget device →  206
‣ Analog IP →  207
Operating mode →  207
RTD type →  207
160 Endress+Hauser
RTD connection type →  208
Process value →  208
Process variable →  209
0 % value →  209
100 % value →  209
Input value →  210
Minimum probe temperature →  210
Maximum probe temperature →  210
Probe position →  211
Damping factor →  211
Gauge current →  211
‣ Analog I/O →  213
Current span →  214
Fixed current →  215
Analog input source →  215
Failure mode →  216
Error value →  217
0 % value →  217
100 % value →  218
Input value % →  218
Output values →  218
Process variable →  219
Analog input 0% value →  219
Endress+Hauser 161
Analog input 100% value →  219
Error event type →  220
Process value →  220
Input value in mA →  220
Input value percent →  221
Used for SIL/WHG →  221
Expected SIL/WHG chain →  222
‣ Digital Xx-x →  223
Digital input source →  224
Contact type →  225
Output simulation →  225
Output values →  226
Readback value →  226
Used for SIL/WHG →  227
‣ Digital input mapping →  228
Digital input source 1 →  228
Digital input source 2 →  228
Gauge command 0 →  229
162 Endress+Hauser
‣ Communication →  232
‣ Communication interface 1 to 2
Communication interface protocol →  232
‣ Configuration →  233
‣ V1 input selector →  239
‣ HART output →  243
‣ Information →  251
‣ Application →  253
‣ Tank configuration →  253
‣ Level →  253
‣ Temperature →  257
‣ Density →  261
‣ Pressure →  263
‣ Tank calculation →  268
‣ HyTD →  270
‣ CTSh →  275
‣ HTMS →  280
‣ Alarm →  283
‣ Alarm 1 to 4 →  283
‣ Safety settings →  292
Output out of range →  292
High stop level →  292
Low stop level →  293
Endress+Hauser 163
Slow hoist zone →  293
Overtension weight →  293
Undertension weight →  294
‣ Sensor config →  295
Post gauge command →  295
‣ Displacer →  296
Displacer type →  296
Displacer diameter →  296
Displacer weight →  296
Displacer volume →  297
Displacer balance volume →  297
Displacer height →  297
Immersion depth →  298
‣ Wiredrum →  299
Drum circumference →  299
Wire weight →  299
‣ Spot density →  300
Upper density offset →  300
Middle density offset →  300
Lower density offset →  300
Submersion depth →  301
‣ Profile density →  302
Density measurement mode →  302
Manual profile level →  302
Profile density offset distance →  302
164 Endress+Hauser
Profile density interval →  303
Profile density offset →  303
‣ Display →  304
Language →  304
Format display →  304
Value 1 to 4 display →  305
Decimal places 1 to 4 →  306
Separator →  307
Number format →  307
Header →  308
Header text →  308
Display interval →  308
Display damping →  309
Backlight →  309
Contrast display →  309
‣ System units →  311
Units preset →  184
Distance unit →  311
Pressure unit →  312
Temperature unit →  312
Density unit →  312
‣ Date / time →  314
Date/time →  314
Set date →  314
Year →  314
Endress+Hauser 165
Month →  315
Day →  315
Hour →  315
Minute →  316
‣ SIL confirmation →  317
‣ Deactivate SIL/WHG →  317
‣ Administration →  318
Define access code →  318
Device reset →  318
 Diagnostics →  320
Actual diagnostics →  320
Timestamp →  320
Previous diagnostics →  320
Timestamp →  321
Operating time from restart →  321
Operating time →  321
Date/time →  314
‣ Diagnostic list →  323
Diagnostics 1 to 5 →  323
Timestamp 1 to 5 →  323
‣ Device information →  324
Device tag →  324
Serial number →  324
Firmware version →  324
Firmware CRC →  324
166 Endress+Hauser
Weight and measures configuration →  325

CRC
Device name →  325
Order code →  325
Extended order code 1 to 3 →  325
‣ Simulation →  327
Device alarm simulation →  327
Diagnostic event simulation →  327
Simulation distance on →  327
Simulation distance →  328
Current output 1 simulation →  328
Simulation value →  328
‣ Device check →  330
Result drum check →  330
‣ Commissioning check →  331
Commissioning check →  331
Result drum check →  330
Step X / 11 →  331
15.2 "Operation" menu

The Operation menu (→  167) shows the most important measured values and allows
to issue a gauge command.
Navigation  Operation
Gauge command 
Navigation  Operation → Gauge command
Description Gauge operation command to choose the measurement mode of the device.
Endress+Hauser 167
Selection • Stop
• Level
• Up
• Bottom level
• Upper I/F level
• Lower I/F level
• Upper density
• Middle density
• Lower density
• Repeatability
• Water dip
• Release overtension
• Tank profile
• Interface profile
• Manual profile
• Level standby
Factory setting Stop
Additional information Read access Operator
Write access Maintenance
Distance
Navigation  Operation → Distance
Description Shows measured distance from reference position.
Write access -
Net weight
Navigation  Operation → Net weight
Description Shows the corrected weight data from the detector, as compensated by the drum table,
This weight is used for measurement.
Write access -
168 Endress+Hauser
Gauge status
Navigation  Operation → Gauge status
Description Indicates the current status of the device gauge command.
Write access -
Balance flag
Navigation  Operation → Balance flag
Description Indicates the validity of the Measurement. If balanced, corresponding Value (Liquid Level,
Upper Interface, Lower Interface, Tank Bottom ) is updated.
Write access -
Standby level 
Navigation  Operation → Standby level
Description Defines the position in the tank where the displacer waits for the liquid level to rise during
standby level gauge command.
User entry –999 999.9 to 999 999.9 mm
Factory setting 0 mm
Endress+Hauser 169
6
5
2
4
3
A0040297
 82 Displacer waiting for the liquid level to rise during standby level gauge command
1 Gauge reference height
2 Empty
3 Datum plate
4 Standby level
5 Standby distance
6 Reference position
One-time command status
Navigation  Operation → One-time Cmd
Description Indicates the status of the last executed one-time gauge command.
Write access -
Additional information One-time command is available for all gauge commands, excepting Level, Stop, Up,
and Interface.
170 Endress+Hauser
15.2.1 "Level" submenu
Navigation  Operation → Level
Tank level
Navigation  Operation → Level → Tank level
Description Shows the distance from the zero position (tank bottom or datum plate) to the product
surface.
Write access -
Tank Level %
Navigation  Operation → Level → Tank Level %
Description Shows the level as a percentage of the full measuring range.
Write access -
Tank ullage
Navigation  Operation → Level → Tank ullage
Description Shows the remaining empty space in the tank.
Write access -
Tank ullage %
Navigation  Operation → Level → Tank ullage %
Description Shows the remaining empty space in percentage related to parameter tank reference
height.
Write access -
Endress+Hauser 171
Upper interface level
Navigation  Operation → Level → Upper I/F level
Description Shows measured interface level from zero position (tank bottom or datum plate). Value is
updated when device generates a valid Interface measurement.
Additional information Read access Maintenance
Write access -
Upper interface level timestamp
Navigation  Operation → Level → Up I/F timestamp
Description Shows timestamp for the last measured upper interface level.
Write access -
Lower interface level
Navigation  Operation → Level → Lower I/F level
Description Shows measured interface level from zero position (tank bottom or datum plate). Value is
updated when device generates a valid interface measurement.
Write access -
Lower interface level timestamp
Navigation  Operation → Level → LowI/F timestamp
Description Shows timestamp of the last measured lower interface level.
Write access -
172 Endress+Hauser
Bottom level
Navigation  Operation → Level → Bottom level
Description Shows the bottom level.
Write access -
Bottom level timestamp
Navigation  Operation → Level → BotLev timestamp
Description Shows the timestamp for measured bottom level.
Write access -
Water level
Navigation  Operation → Level → Water level
Description Shows the bottom water level.
Write access -
Measured level
Navigation  Operation → Level → Measured level
Description Shows the measured level without any correction from the tank calculations.
Write access -
Endress+Hauser 173
Distance
Navigation  Operation → Level → Distance
Write access -
Displacer position
Navigation  Operation → Level → Displacer pos
Description Shows the displacer position.
Write access -
15.2.2 "Temperature" submenu
Navigation  Operation → Temperature
Air temperature
Navigation  Operation → Temperature → Air temp.
Description Shows the air temperature.
Write access -
Liquid temperature
Navigation  Operation → Temperature → Liquid temp.
Description Shows the average or spot temperature of the measured liquid.
Write access -
174 Endress+Hauser
Vapor temperature
Navigation  Operation → Temperature → Vapor temp.
Description Shows the measured vapor temperature.
Write access -
"NMT element values" submenu

This submenu is only visible if a Prothermo NMT is connected.
Navigation  Operation → Temperature → NMT elem. values
"Element temperature" submenu
Navigation  Operation → Temperature → NMT elem. values → Element

temp.
Element temperature 1 to 24
Navigation  Operation → Temperature → NMT elem. values → Element temp. → Element temp
1 to 24
Description Shows the temperature of an element in the NMT.
Write access -
Endress+Hauser 175
"Element position" submenu
Navigation  Operation → Temperature → NMT elem. values → Element

position
Element position 1 to 24
Navigation  Operation → Temperature → NMT elem. values → Element position → Element pos.
1 to 24
Description Shows the position of the selected element in the NMT.
Write access -
15.2.3 "Density" submenu
Navigation  Operation → Density
Observed density
Navigation  Operation → Density → Observed density
Description Calculated density of the product.
Write access -
This value is calculated from different measured variables depending on the selected
calculation method.
Vapor density 
Navigation  Operation → Density → Vapor density
Description Defines the density of the gas phase in the tank.
User entry 0.0 to 500.0 kg/m³
Factory setting 1.2 kg/m³
176 Endress+Hauser
Air density 
Navigation  Operation → Density → Air density
Description Defines the density of the air surrounding the tank.
Measured upper density
Navigation  Operation → Density → Meas upper dens.
Description Shows the density of the upper phase.
Write access -
Upper density timestamp
Navigation  Operation → Density → UpDens timestamp
Description Shows timestamp of the last measured upper density.
Write access -
Measured middle density
Navigation  Operation → Density → Meas middle dens
Description Density of the middle phase.
Endress+Hauser 177
Write access -
Middle Density Timestamp
Navigation  Operation → Density → MidDensTimestamp
Description Shows the timestamp of the last measured middle density.
Write access -
Measured lower density
Navigation  Operation → Density → Meas lower dens.
Description Density of the lower phase.
Write access -
Lower density timestamp
Navigation  Operation → Density → LowerDensTimestp
Description Shows timestamp of last measured lower density.
Write access -
Profile point
Navigation  Operation → Density → Profile point
Description Shows actual number of Density Points measured so far in current operation, and the total
Number of Points after Density Profile Operation is complete.
Write access -
178 Endress+Hauser
Profile average density
Navigation  Operation → Density → Profile avg dens
Description Shows the average density calculated after a profile density measurement is complete.
Write access -
Profile density timestamp
Navigation  Operation → Density → Profil dens time
Description Shows the timestamp when the last average density profile was finished.
Write access -
Endress+Hauser 179
"Profile density" submenu
Navigation  Operation → Density → Profile density
Profile density 0 to 49
Navigation  Operation → Density → Profile density → Profile dens 0 to 49
Description Shows the density measurement at the corresponding profile density position.
Write access -
Profile density position 0 to 49
Navigation  Operation → Density → Profile density → Profile pos 0 to 49
Description Shows the position where the corresponding density was measured.
Write access -
15.2.4 "Pressure" submenu
Navigation  Operation → Pressure
P1 (bottom)
Navigation  Operation → Pressure → P1 (bottom)
Description Shows the pressure at the tank bottom.
Write access -
180 Endress+Hauser
P3 (top)
Navigation  Operation → Pressure → P3 (top)
Description Shows the pressure (P3) at the top transmitter.
Write access -
Endress+Hauser 181
15.2.5 "GP values" submenu
Navigation  Operation → GP values
GP 1 to 4 name 
Navigation  Operation → GP values → GP 1 name
Description Defines the label associated with the respective GP value.
Factory setting GP Value 1
GP Value 1
Navigation  Operation → GP values → GP Value 1
Description Displays the value that will be used as general purpose value.
Write access -
GP Value 2
Write access -
GP Value 3
182 Endress+Hauser
Write access -
GP Value 4
Write access -
Endress+Hauser 183
15.3 "Setup" menu

Navigation  Setup
Device tag 
Navigation  Setup → Device tag
Description Enter a unique name for the measuring point to identify the device quickly within the
plant.
Factory setting NMS8x
Units preset 
Navigation  Setup → Units preset
Description Defines a set of units for length, pressure and temperature.
Selection • mm, bar, °C

• m, bar, °C
• mm, PSI, °C
• ft, PSI, °F
• ft-in-16, PSI, °F
• Customer value
Factory setting mm, bar, °C
If the Customer value option is selected, the units are defined in the following
parameters. In any other case these are read-only parameters used to indicate the
respective unit:
• Distance unit (→  311)
• Pressure unit (→  312)
• Temperature unit (→  312)
184 Endress+Hauser
Upper density 
Navigation  Setup → Upper density
Description Sets the density of the upper phase of the liquid.
User entry 50 to 2 000 kg/m³
Factory setting 800 kg/m³
Middle density 
Navigation  Setup → Middle density
Description Sets Density of Middle Phase in the Tank if three Phases are available. Otherwise used for
the Lower Phase in the Tank if two Phases are available.
Factory setting 1 000 kg/m³
Lower density 
Navigation  Setup → Lower density
Description Sets the density of the lower Phase in the tank if three phases are available.
Endress+Hauser 185
Gauge command 
Navigation  Setup → Gauge command
Description Gauge operation command to choose the measurement mode of the device.
Selection • Stop
• Level
• Up
• Bottom level
• Upper I/F level
• Lower I/F level
• Upper density
• Middle density
• Lower density
• Repeatability
• Water dip
• Tank profile
• Manual profile
• Level standby
Process condition 
Navigation  Setup → Process cond.
Description Select the liquid condition of the tank.
Selection • Universal
• Calm surface
• Turbulent surface
Factory setting Universal
Additional information For W&M, setting to option Calm surface is recommended.
Read access Operator
186 Endress+Hauser
Empty 
Navigation  Setup → Empty
Description Distance from reference point to zero position (tank bottom or datum plate).
User entry 0 to 10 000.00 mm
Factory setting Dependent on the device version
The reference point is the reference line of the calibration window.
Tank reference height 
Navigation  Setup → Tank ref height
Description Defines the distance from the dipping reference point to the zero position (tank bottom or
datum plate).
Tank level
Navigation  Setup → Tank level
surface.
Write access -
Endress+Hauser 187
Set level 
Navigation  Setup → Set level
Description If the level measured by the device does not match the actual level obtained by a manual
dip, enter the correct level into this parameter.
The device adjusts the Empty parameter (→  187) according to the entered value, such
that the measured level will match the actual level.
Level source 
Navigation  Setup → Level source
Description Defines the source of the level value.
Selection • No input value

• HART device 1 ... 15 level
• Level SR *
• Level *
• Displacer position *
• AIO B1-3 value *
• AIO C1-3 value *
• AIP B4-8 value *
• AIP C4-8 value *
High stop level 
Navigation  Setup → High stop level
Description Position of the displacer high stop as measured from defined zero position (tank bottom or
datum plate).
* Visibility depends on order options or device settings
188 Endress+Hauser
User entry –999 999.9 to 999 999.9 mm
Factory setting 20 000 mm
Low stop level 
Navigation  Setup → Low stop level
Description Position of the displacer low stop as measured from defined zero position (tank bottom or
datum plate).
User entry –999 999.9 to 999 999.9 mm
Distance
Navigation  Setup → Distance
Write access -
Liquid temp source 
Navigation  Setup → Liq temp source
Description Defines source from which the liquid temperature is obtained.
Selection • Manual value

• HART device 1 ... 15 temperature
• AIO B1-3 value
• AIO C1-3 value
• AIP B4-8 value
• AIP C4-8 value
Factory setting Manual value
Endress+Hauser 189
190 Endress+Hauser
15.3.1 "Calibration" submenu
Read access Maintenance
Navigation  Setup → Calibration
"Move displacer" wizard
Navigation  Setup → Calibration → Move displacer
Move distance 
Navigation  Setup → Calibration → Move displacer → Move distance
Description Up or down movement of displacer in mm.
Distance
Navigation  Setup → Calibration → Move displacer → Distance
Write access -
Move displacer 
Navigation  Setup → Calibration → Move displacer → Move displacer
Selection • Stop
• Move down
• Move up
Endress+Hauser 191
Motor status
Navigation  Setup → Calibration → Move displacer → Motor status
Description Shows the current moving Direction of the Motor.
Write access -
Move displacer 
Navigation  Setup → Calibration → Move displacer → Move displacer
Selection • No
• Yes
Factory setting No
192 Endress+Hauser
"Sensor calibration" wizard
Navigation  Setup → Calibration → Sensor cal.
Sensor calibration 
Navigation  Setup → Calibration → Sensor cal. → Sensor cal.
Description This sequence calibrates the sensor of the servo.
Offset weight 
Navigation  Setup → Calibration → Sensor cal. → Offset wgt.
Description Sets the weight that is used for the lower point sensor calibration. Changing the value will
delete the calibration data.
User entry 0 to 150 g
For density measurement application, it is recommended to apply 50 g.
Span weight 
Navigation  Setup → Calibration → Sensor cal. → Span wgt.
Description Sets the weight that is used for the middle point sensor calibration. Changing the value
will delete the calibration data.
User entry 10 to 999.9 g
Endress+Hauser 193
Zero calibration 
Navigation  Setup → Calibration → Sensor cal. → Zero calibration
Description In this step the sensor calibration zero weight will be done.
Calibration status
Navigation  Setup → Calibration → Sensor cal. → Status
Description Gives feedback on the latest status of the calibration process.
Write access -
Offset calibration 
Navigation  Setup → Calibration → Sensor cal. → Offset cal.
Description In this step the sensor calibration with offset weight will be done.
Span calibration 
Navigation  Setup → Calibration → Sensor cal. → Span calibration
Description In this step the sensor calibration with span weight will be done.
194 Endress+Hauser
"Reference calibration" wizard
Navigation  Setup → Calibration → Reference cal.
Reference calibration 
Navigation  Setup → Calibration → Reference cal. → Reference cal.
Description This sequence will move the displacer to the mechanical stop and set the reference
position.
Reference position 
Navigation  Setup → Calibration → Reference cal. → Ref. position
Description Defines in mm, during reference calibration, the distance between mechanical stop inside
the drum housing and the middle of the wire ring.
Progress 
Navigation  Setup → Calibration → Reference cal. → Progress
Description Gives feedback on the latest status of the reference calibration process.
Endress+Hauser 195
Calibration status
Navigation  Setup → Calibration → Reference cal. → Status
Write access -
196 Endress+Hauser
"Drum calibration" wizard
Navigation  Setup → Calibration → Drum cal.
Drum calibration 
Navigation  Setup → Calibration → Drum cal. → Drum cal.
Description This sequence will perform a drum calibration.
Set high weight 
Navigation  Setup → Calibration → Drum cal. → Set high weight
Description High weight that is used for a drum calibration (normally it is the displacer weight).
Make drum table 
Navigation  Setup → Calibration → Drum cal. → Make drum table
Description This will perform a drum calibration.
Drum table point
Navigation  Setup → Calibration → Drum cal. → Drum table point
Description Shows the currently measured point of the drum calibration. Maximum number of
measured points is 50.
Endress+Hauser 197
Write access -
Calibration status
Navigation  Setup → Calibration → Drum cal. → Status
Write access -
Make low table 
Navigation  Setup → Calibration → Drum cal. → Make low table
Description For additional accuracy it is possible to perform a second drum calibration with low weight.
Choose 'Yes' or 'No' to start/stop calibration.
Selection • No
• Yes
Factory setting No
Set low weight 
Navigation  Setup → Calibration → Drum cal. → Set low weight
Description Set weight for additional drum calibration sequence.
198 Endress+Hauser
15.3.2 "Advanced setup" submenu
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup
Locking status
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Locking status
Description Indicates the write protection with the highest priority that is currently active.
Write access -
Access status tooling
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Access stat.tool
Description Shows the access authorization to the parameters via the operating tool.
Write access -
Enter access code
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Ent. access code
Description Enter access code to disable write protection of parameters.
Write access Operator
Endress+Hauser 199
"Input/output" submenu
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output
"HART devices" submenu
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → HART devices
Number of devices
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → HART devices → Number devices
Description Shows the number of devices on the HART bus.
Write access -
200 Endress+Hauser
"HART Device(s)" submenu

There is a HART Device(s) submenu for each HART slave device found on the HART
loop.

→ HART Device(s)
Device name
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → HART devices → HART Device(s)

→ Device name
Description Shows the name of the transmitter.
Write access -
Polling address

→ Polling address
Description Shows the polling address of the transmitter.
Write access -
Device tag

→ Device tag
Description Shows the device tag of the transmitter.
Write access -
Endress+Hauser 201
Operating mode 

→ Operating mode
Prerequisite Not available if the HART device is a Prothermo NMT.
Description Selection of the operation mode PV only or PV,SV,TV,QV. Devines which values are polled
from the connected HART Device.
Selection • PV only
• PV,SV,TV & QV
• Level 5)
• Measured level 5)
Factory setting PV,SV,TV & QV
Communication status

→ Comm. status
Description Shows the operating status of the transmitter.
User interface • Operating normally

• Device offline
Write access -
#blank# ( HART PV - designation dependent on device)

→ #blank#
Description Shows the first HART variable (PV).
Write access -
5) only visible if the connected device is a Micropilot
202 Endress+Hauser
#blank# (HART SV - designation dependent on device)

→ #blank#
Prerequisite For HART devices other than NMT: Operating mode (→  202) = PV,SV,TV & QV
Description Shows the second HART variable (SV).
Write access -
#blank# (HART TV - designation dependent on device)

→ #blank#
Description Shows the third HART variable (TV).
Write access -
#blank# (HART QV - designation dependent on device)

→ #blank#
Description Shows the fourth HART variable (QV).
Write access -
Output pressure 

→ Output pressure
Prerequisite Not available for Micropilot S FMR5xx and Prothermo 53x. (In these cases the measured
variables are allocated automatically).
Endress+Hauser 203
Description Defines which HART variable is the pressure.
Selection • No value
• Primary variable (PV)
• Secondary variable (SV)
• Tertiary variable (TV)
• Quaternary variable (QV)
Factory setting No value
Output density 

→ Output density
Description Defines which HART variable is the density.
Output temperature 

→ Output temp.
Description Defines which HART variable is the temperature.
204 Endress+Hauser
Output vapor temperature 

→ Output vapor tmp
Description Defines which HART variable is the vapor temperature.
Output level 

→ Output level
Description Defines which HART variable is the level.
Endress+Hauser 205
"Forget device" wizard
This submenu is only visible if Number of devices (→  200) ≥ 1.

→ Forget device
Forget device 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → HART devices → Forget device → Forget
device
Description With this function an offline device can be deleted from the device list.
Selection • HART Device 1 *

• HART Device 2 *
• HART Device 3 *
• HART Device 4 *
• HART Device 5 *
• HART Device 6 *
• HART Device 7 *
• HART Device 8 *
• HART Device 9 *
• HART Device 10 *
• None
Factory setting None
206 Endress+Hauser
"Analog IP" submenu

There is a Analog IP submenu for each Analog I/O module of the device. This
submenu refers to terminals 4 to 8 of this module (the analog input). They are
primarily used to connect an RTD. For terminals 1 to 3 (analog input or output) refer
to →  213.
D 1 2 3 4
1
E 2
CDI
1 C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
i
C1-3 C4-8
F 12 3
4
B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
HR
on
POWER
WP A 1 2 3 4
SIM
B1-3 B4-8
A0032465
 83 Terminals for the "Analog IP" submenu ("B4-8" or "C4-8", respectively)
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → Analog IP
Operating mode 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → Analog IP → Operating mode
Description Defines the operating mode of the analog input.
Selection • Disabled
• RTD temperature input
• Gauge power supply
Factory setting Disabled
RTD type 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → Analog IP → RTD type
Prerequisite Operating mode (→  207) = RTD temperature input
Description Defines the type of the connected RTD.
Endress+Hauser 207
Selection • Cu50 (w=1.428, GOST)

• Cu53 (w=1.426, GOST)
• Cu90; 0°C (w=1.4274, GOST)
• Cu100; 25°C (w=1.4274, GOST)
• Cu100; 0°C(w=1.4274, GOST)
• Pt46 (w=1.391, GOST)
• Pt50 (w=1.391, GOST)
• Pt100(385) (a=0.00385, IEC751)
• Pt100(389) (a=0.00389, Canadian)
• Pt100(391) (a=0.003916, JIS1604)
• Pt100 (w=1.391, GOST)
• Pt500(385) (a=0.00385, IEC751)
• Pt1000(385) (a=0.00385, IEC751)
• Ni100(617) (a=0.00617, DIN43760)
• Ni120(672) (a=0.00672, DIN43760)
• Ni1000(617) (a=0.00617, DIN43760)
Factory setting Pt100(385) (a=0.00385, IEC751)
RTD connection type 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → Analog IP → RTD connect type
Description Defines the connection type of the RTD.
Selection • 4 wire RTD connection

• 2 wire RTD connection
• 3 wire RTD connection
Factory setting 4 wire RTD connection
Process value
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → Analog IP → Process value
Prerequisite Operating mode (→  207) ≠ Disabled
Description Shows the measured value received via the analog input.
208 Endress+Hauser
Write access -
Process variable 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → Analog IP → Process variable
Prerequisite Operating mode (→  207) ≠ RTD temperature input
Description Determines type of measured value.
Selection • Level linearized

• Temperature
• Pressure
• Density
Factory setting Level linearized
0 % value 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → Analog IP → 0 % value
Prerequisite Operating mode (→  207) = 4..20mA input
Description Defines the value represented by a current of 4mA.
User entry Signed floating-point number
100 % value 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → Analog IP → 100 % value
Prerequisite Operating mode (→  207) = 4..20mA input
Description Defines the value represented by a current of 20mA.
Endress+Hauser 209
Input value
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → Analog IP → Input value
Description Shows the value received via the analog input.
Write access -
Minimum probe temperature 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → Analog IP → Min. probe temp
Description Minimum approved temperature of the connected probe. If the temperature falls below
this value, the W&M status will be 'invalid'.
User entry –213 to 927 °C
Factory setting –100 °C
Maximum probe temperature 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → Analog IP → Max. probe temp
Description Maximum approved temperature of the connected probe. If the temperature rises above
this value, the W&M status will be 'invalid'.
210 Endress+Hauser
Factory setting 250 °C
Probe position 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → Analog IP → Probe position
Description Position of the temperature probe, measured from zero position (tank bottom or datum
plate). This parameter, in conjunction with the measured level, determines whether the
temperature probe is still covered by the product. If this is no longer the case, the status of
the temperature value will be 'invalid'.
User entry –5 000 to 30 000 mm
Damping factor 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → Analog IP → Damping factor
Description Defines the damping constant (in seconds).
User entry 0 to 999.9 s
Factory setting 0s
Gauge current
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → Analog IP → Gauge current
Prerequisite Operating mode (→  207) = Gauge power supply
Endress+Hauser 211
Description Shows the current on the power supply line for the connected device.
Write access -
212 Endress+Hauser
"Analog I/O" submenu

There is a Analog I/O submenu for each Analog I/O module of the device. This
submenu refers to terminals 1 to 3 of this module (an analog input or output). For
terminals 4 to 8 (always an analog input) refer to →  207.
D 1 2 3 4
1
E 2
CDI
1 C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
i
C1-3 C4-8
F 12 3
4
B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
HR
on
POWER
WP A 1 2 3 4
SIM
B1-3 B4-8
A0032464
 84 Terminals for the "Analog I/O" submenu ("B1-3" or "C1-3", respectively)
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → Analog I/O
Operating mode 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → Analog I/O → Operating mode
Description Defines the operating mode of the analog I/O module.
• 4..20mA input
• HART master+4..20mA input
• HART master
• 4..20mA output
• HART slave +4..20mA output

Operating mode (→  213) Direction of signal Type of signal
Disabled - -
4..20mA input Input from 1 external device Analog (4...20mA)
HART master+4..20mA input Input from 1 external device • Analog (4...20mA)

• HART
HART master Input from up to 6 external devices HART
Endress+Hauser 213
Operating mode (→  213) Direction of signal Type of signal
4..20mA output Output to higher-level unit Analog (4...20mA)
HART slave +4..20mA output Output to higher-level unit • Analog (4...20mA)

• HART
Depending on the terminals used, the Analog I/O module is used in the passive or active
mode.
Mode Terminals of the I/O module
1 2 3
Passive - + not used

(power supply from external source)
Active not used - +

(power supplied by the device itself)
In the active mode the following conditions must be met:

• Maximum current consumption of the connected HART devices: 24 mA
(i.e. 4 mA per device if 6 devices are connected).
• Output voltage of the Ex-d module: 17.0 V@4 mA to 10.5 V@22 mA
• Output voltage of the Ex-ia module: 18.5 V@4 mA to 12.5 V@22 mA
Current span 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → Analog I/O → Current span
Prerequisite Operating mode parameter (→  213) ≠ Disabled option or HART master option
Description Defines the current range for the measured value transmission.
Selection • 4...20 mA NAMUR (3.8...20.5 mA)

• 4...20 mA US (3.9...20.8 mA)
• 4...20 mA (4... 20.5 mA)
• Fixed current *
Factory setting 4...20 mA NAMUR (3.8...20.5 mA)

Option Current range Minimum Lower alarm Upper alarm Maximum
for process value signal level signal level value
variable
4...20 mA (4... 20.5 4 to 20.5 mA 3.5 mA < 3.6 mA > 21.95 mA 22.6 mA
mA)
4...20 mA NAMUR 3.8 to 20.5 mA 3.5 mA < 3.6 mA > 21.95 mA 22.6 mA
(3.8...20.5 mA)
214 Endress+Hauser
Option Current range Minimum Lower alarm Upper alarm Maximum

for process value signal level signal level value
variable
4...20 mA US 3.9 to 20.8 mA 3.5 mA < 3.6 mA > 21.95 mA 22.0 mA

(3.9...20.8 mA)
Fixed current Constant current, defined in the Fixed current parameter (→  215).
In the case of an error, the output current assumes the value defined in the Failure
mode parameter (→  216).
Fixed current 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → Analog I/O → Fixed current
Prerequisite Current span (→  214) = Fixed current
Description Defines the fixed output current.
User entry 4 to 22.5 mA
Factory setting 4 mA
Analog input source 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → Analog I/O → Analog source
Prerequisite • Operating mode (→  213) = 4..20mA output or HART slave +4..20mA output
• Current span (→  214) ≠ Fixed current
Description Defines the process variable transmitted via the AIO.
Selection • None
• Tank level
• Tank level %
• Tank ullage
• Tank ullage %
• Measured level
• Distance
• Displacer position
• Water level
• Upper interface level
• Lower interface level
• Bottom level
• Tank reference height
• Liquid temperature
• Vapor temperature
Endress+Hauser 215
• Air temperature
• Observed density value
• Average profile density 6)
• Upper density
• Middle density
• Lower density
• P1 (bottom)
• P2 (middle)
• P3 (top)
• GP 1 ... 4 value
• AIO B1-3 value 6)
• AIO B1-3 value mA 6)
• AIO C1-3 value 6)
• AIO C1-3 value mA 6)
• AIP B4-8 value 6)
• AIP C4-8 value 6)
• Element temperature 1 ... 24 6)
• HART device 1...15 PV 6)
• HART device 1 ... 15 PV mA 6)
• HART device 1 ... 15 PV % 6)
• HART device 1 ... 15 SV 6)
• HART device 1 ... 15 TV 6)
• HART device 1 ... 15 QV 6)
Factory setting Tank level
Failure mode 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → Analog I/O → Failure mode
Prerequisite Operating mode (→  213) = 4..20mA output or HART slave +4..20mA output
Description Defines the output behavior in case of an error.
Selection • Min.
• Max.
• Last valid value
• Actual value
• Defined value
Factory setting Max.
6) Visibility depends on order options or device settings
216 Endress+Hauser
Error value 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → Analog I/O → Error value
Prerequisite Failure mode (→  216) = Defined value
Description Defines the output value in case of an error.
User entry 3.4 to 22.6 mA
Factory setting 22 mA
Input value
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → Analog I/O → Input value
Description Shows the input value of the analog I/O module.
Write access -
0 % value 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → Analog I/O → 0 % value
Description Value corresponding to an output current of 0% (4mA).
Factory setting 0 Unitless
Endress+Hauser 217
100 % value 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → Analog I/O → 100 % value
Description Value corresponding to an output current of 100% (20mA).
Factory setting 0 Unitless
Input value %
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → Analog I/O → Input value %
Description Shows the output value as a percentage of the complete 4...20mA range.
Write access -
Output value
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → Analog I/O → Output value
Prerequisite Operating mode (→  213) = 4..20mA output or HART slave +4..20mA output
Description Shows the output value in mA.
Write access -
218 Endress+Hauser
Process variable 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → Analog I/O → Process variable
Prerequisite Operating mode (→  213) = 4..20mA input or HART master+4..20mA input
Description Defines the type of measuring variable.
Selection • Level linearized

• Temperature
• Pressure
• Density
Factory setting Level linearized
Analog input 0% value 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → Analog I/O → AI 0% value
Description Value corresponding to an input current of 0% (4mA).
Analog input 100% value 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → Analog I/O → AI 100% value
Description Value corresponding to an input current of 100% (20mA).
Endress+Hauser 219
Error event type 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → Analog I/O → Error event type
Prerequisite Operating mode (→  213) ≠ Disabled or HART master
Description Defines the type of event message (alarm/warning) in case of an error or output out of
range in the analog I/O module.
Selection • None
• Warning
• Alarm
Factory setting Warning
Process value
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → Analog I/O → Process value
Description Shows the input value scaled to customer units.
Write access -
Input value in mA
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → Analog I/O → Input val. in mA
Description Shows the input value in mA.
Write access -
220 Endress+Hauser
Input value percent
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → Analog I/O → Input value [%]
Description Shows the input value as a percentage of the complete 4...20mA current range.
Write access -
Damping factor 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → Analog I/O → Damping factor
Prerequisite Operating mode (→  213) ≠ Disabled or HART master
Factory setting 0s
Used for SIL/WHG 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → Analog I/O → Used for SIL/WHG
• The device has a SIL approval.
Description Determines whether the discrete I/O module is in SIL/WHG mode.
Selection • Enabled
• Disabled
Endress+Hauser 221
Expected SIL/WHG chain
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → Analog I/O → SIL/WHG chain
• The device has a SIL approval.
Write access -
222 Endress+Hauser
"Digital Xx-x" submenu

• In the operating menu, each digital input or output is designated by the respective
slot of the terminal compartment and two terminals within this slot. A1-2, for
example, denotes terminals 1 and 2 of slot A. The same is valid for slots B, C and D
if they contain a Digital IO module.
• In this document, Xx-x designates any of these submenus. The structure of all these
submenus is the same.
D 1 2 3 4
1
E 2 C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1
CDI
C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
i C1-2 C3-4
F 12 3
4
B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A 1 2 3 4
HR
on
POWER
WP A 1 2 3 4
SIM
A1-2 A3-4
A0026424
 85 Designation of the digital inputs or outputs (examples)
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → Digital Xx-x
Operating mode 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → Digital Xx-x → Operating mode
Description Defines the operating mode of the discrete I/O module.
• Output passive
• Input passive
• Input active
Endress+Hauser 223
Additional information
A B C
DIO DIO DIO
2/4 2/4 2/4
+ +
_ _
1/3 1/3 1/3
A0033028
 86 Operating modes of the Digital I/O module

A Input passive
B Input active
C Output passive
Digital input source 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → Digital Xx-x → Digital source
Prerequisite Operating mode (→  223) = Output passive
Description Defines which device state is indicated by the digital output.
Selection • None
• Alarm x any
• Alarm x High
• Alarm x HighHigh
• Alarm x High or HighHigh
• Alarm x Low
• Alarm x LowLow
• Alarm x Low or LowLow
• Digital Xx-x
• Primary Modbus x
• Secondary Modbus x
Additional information Meaning of the options

• Alarm x any, Alarm x High, Alarm x HighHigh, Alarm x High or HighHigh, Alarm x
Low, Alarm x LowLow, Alarm x Low or LowLow
The digital output indicates if the selected alarm is currently active. The alarms
themselves are defined in the Alarm 1 to 4 submenus.
• Digital Xx-x 7)
The digital signal present at the digital input Xx-x is passed through to the digital
output.
• Modbus A1-4 Discrete x
Modbus B1-4 Discrete x
Modbus C1-4 Discrete x
Modbus D1-4 Discrete x
The digital value written by the Modbus Master device to the Modbus discrete x
parameter 8) is passed to the digital output. For details refer to Special Documentation
SD02066G.
7) Only present if "Operating mode (→  223)" = "Input passive" or "Input active" for the respective Digital I/O module.
8) Expert → Communication → Modbus Xx-x → Modbus discrete x
224 Endress+Hauser
Input value
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → Digital Xx-x → Input value
Prerequisite Operating mode (→  223) = "Input passive" option or "Input active" option
Description Shows the digital input value.
Write access -
Contact type 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → Digital Xx-x → Contact type
Description Determines the switching behavior of the input or output.
Selection • Normally open

• Normally closed
Factory setting Normally open
Output simulation 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → Digital Xx-x → Output sim
Description Sets the output to a specific simulated value.
Selection • Disable
• Simulating active
• Simulating inactive
• Fault 1
• Fault 2
Factory setting Disable
The digital output consists of two relays connected in series:
Endress+Hauser 225
3 1
A0028602
 87 The two relays of a digital output

1/2 The relays
3/4 The terminals of the digital output
The switching state of these relays is defined by the Output simulation parameter as
follows:
Output simulation State of relay 1 State of relay 2 Expected result on the

terminals of the I/O module
Simulating active Closed Closed Closed
Simulating inactive Open Open Open
Fault 1 Closed Open Open
Fault 2 Open Closed Open
The Fault 1 and Fault 2 options can be used to check the correct switching behavior
of the two relays.
Output value
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → Digital Xx-x → Output values
Description Shows the digital output value.
Write access -
Readback value
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → Digital Xx-x → Readback value
Description Shows the value read back from the output.
226 Endress+Hauser
Write access -
Used for SIL/WHG 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → Digital Xx-x → Used for SIL/WHG
Prerequisite • Operating mode (→  223) = Output passive

• The device has a SIL certificate.
Description Determines whether the discrete I/O module is in SIL/WHG mode.
Selection • Enabled
• Disabled
Endress+Hauser 227
"Digital input mapping" submenu
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → DI mapping
Digital input source 1 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → DI mapping → Digital source 1
Description Selects the source of digital input #1 (for gauge command).
Selection • None
• Digital A1-2 *
• Digital A3-4 *
• Digital B1-2 *
• Digital B3-4 *
• Digital C1-2 *
• Digital C3-4 *
• Digital D1-2 *
• Digital D3-4 *
Digital input source 2 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → DI mapping → Digital source 2
Description Selects the source of digital input #2 (for gauge command).
Selection • None
• Digital A1-2 *
• Digital A3-4 *
• Digital B1-2 *
• Digital B3-4 *
• Digital C1-2 *
• Digital C3-4 *
• Digital D1-2 *
• Digital D3-4 *
228 Endress+Hauser
Gauge command 0 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Input/output → DI mapping → Gauge command 0
Prerequisite Digital input source 1 (→  228) ≠ None
Description Gauge command assigned to digital input combination 0 (DI2=0, DI1=0).
Selection • Stop
• Level
• Up
• Bottom level
• Upper I/F level
• Lower I/F level
• Upper density
• Middle density
• Lower density
• Repeatability
• Water dip
• Tank profile
• Manual profile
• Level standby
Factory setting Level
Gauge command 1 
Prerequisite Digital input source 1 (→  228) ≠ None
Selection • Stop
• Level
• Up
• Bottom level
• Upper I/F level
• Lower I/F level
• Upper density
• Middle density
• Lower density
• Repeatability
• Water dip
• Tank profile
Endress+Hauser 229
• Manual profile
• Level standby
Factory setting Up
Gauge command 2 
Prerequisite • Digital input source 1 (→  228) ≠ None

• Digital input source 2 (→  228) ≠ None
Description Gauge command assigned to digital Input combination 2 (DI2=1, DI1=0).
Selection • Stop
• Level
• Up
• Bottom level
• Upper I/F level
• Lower I/F level
• Upper density
• Middle density
• Lower density
• Repeatability
• Water dip
• Tank profile
• Manual profile
• Level standby
Gauge command 3 
Prerequisite • Digital input source 1 (→  228) ≠ None

• Digital input source 2 (→  228) ≠ None
230 Endress+Hauser
Selection • Stop
• Level
• Up
• Bottom level
• Upper I/F level
• Lower I/F level
• Upper density
• Middle density
• Lower density
• Repeatability
• Water dip
• Tank profile
• Manual profile
• Level standby
Factory setting Upper I/F level
Endress+Hauser 231
"Communication" submenu
This menu contains a submenu for each digital communication interface of the device. The
communication interfaces are designated by "X1-4" where "X" specifies the slot in the
terminal compartment and "1-4" the terminals within this slot.
D 1 2 3 4
1
E 2 D 1 2 3 4
1
CDI
C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
i D1-4
F 12 3
4
B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A 1 2 3 4
HR
on
POWER
WP A 1 2 3 4
SIM
A1-4
A0031200
 88 Designation of the "Modbus", "V1" or "WM550" modules (examples); depending on the device version these
modules may also be in slot B or C.
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Communication
"Modbus X1-4", "V1 X1-4" and "WM550 X1-4" submenu

This submenu is only present for devices with MODBUS and/or V1 and/or "WM550"
option communication interface. There is one submenu of this type for each
communication interface.
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Communication → Modbus X1-4
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Communication → V1 X1-4
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Communication → WM550 X1-4
Communication interface protocol
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Communication → Modbus X1-4 / V1 X1-4 / WM550

X1-4 → Commu I/F protoc
Description Shows the type of communication protocol.
Write access -
232 Endress+Hauser
"Configuration" submenu
This submenu is only present for devices with a MODBUS communication interface.
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Communication → Modbus X1-4

→ Configuration
Baudrate 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Communication → Modbus X1-4 → Configuration

→ Baudrate
Prerequisite Communication interface protocol (→  232) = MODBUS
Description Defines the baud rate of the Modbus communication.
Selection • 600 BAUD

• 1200 BAUD
• 2400 BAUD
• 4800 BAUD
• 9600 BAUD *
• 19200 BAUD *
Factory setting 9600 BAUD
Parity 

→ Parity
Description Defines the parity of the Modbus communication.
Selection • Odd
• Even
• None / 1 stop bit
• None / 2 stop bits
Factory setting None / 1 stop bit
Endress+Hauser 233
Modbus address 

→ Device ID
Description Defines the Modbus address of the device.
User entry 1 to 247
Factory setting 1
Float swap mode 

→ Float swap mode
Description Sets the format of how the floating point value is transferred on Modbus.
Selection • Normal 3-2-1-0

• Swap 0-1-2-3
• WW Swap 1-0-3-2
Factory setting Swap 0-1-2-3
Bus termination 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Communication → Modbus X1-4 → Configuration → Bus

termination
Description Activates or deactivates the bus termination at the device. Should only be activated on the
last device in a loop.
Selection • Off
• On
234 Endress+Hauser
Factory setting Off
Endress+Hauser 235
This submenu is only present for devices with a V1 communication interface.
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Communication → V1 X1-4

→ Configuration
Communication interface protocol variant 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Communication → V1 X1-4 → Configuration → Protocol

variant
Description Determines which variant of the V1 protocol is used.
User interface • None

• V1 *
V1 address 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Communication → V1 X1-4 → Configuration → V1

address
Prerequisite Communication interface protocol variant (→  236) = V1
Description Identifier of the device for the V1 communication.
User entry 0 to 99
Factory setting 1
236 Endress+Hauser
V1 address 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Communication → V1 X1-4 → Configuration → V1

address
Prerequisite Communication interface protocol variant (→  236)
Description Identifier of the previous device for V1 communication.
User entry 0 to 255
Factory setting 1
Level mapping 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Communication → V1 X1-4 → Configuration → Level

mapping
Prerequisite Communication interface protocol (→  232) = V1
Description Determines the transmittable range of levels.
Selection • +ve
• +ve & -ve
Factory setting +ve
In V1, the level is always represented by a number in the range from 0 to 999 999. This
number corresponds to a level as follows:
"Level mapping" = "+ve"

Number Corresponding level
0 0.0 mm
999 999 99 999.9 mm
"Level mapping" = "+ve & -ve"

0 0.0 mm
500 000 50 000.0 mm
Endress+Hauser 237
500 001 –0.1 mm
999 999 –49 999.9 mm
Line impedance 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Communication → V1 X1-4 → Configuration → Line

impedance
Prerequisite Communication interface protocol (→  232) = V1
Description Adjusts the impedance of the communication line.
User entry 0 to 15
Factory setting 15
The line impedance affects the voltage difference between a logical 0 and a logical 1
on the message of the device to the bus. The default setting is suitable for most
applications.
Compatibility mode 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Communication → Modbus Xx-x / V1 Xx-x

→ Configuration → Comp. mode
Description Defines the compatibility mode.
Selection • Nxx5xx
• Nxx8x
Factory setting Nxx8x
Additional information In NMS5x mode: Only values which have also existed on NMS5x Gauge status are output
on the bus.
In NMS8x mode: All Gauge status are available at this parameter.
238 Endress+Hauser
"V1 input selector" submenu

This submenu is only present for devices with a V1 communication interface.
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Communication → V1 X1-4 → V1

input select.
Alarm 1 input source 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Communication → V1 X1-4 → V1 input select. → Alarm1

input src
Description Determines which discrete value will be transmitted as V1 alarm 1 status.
Selection • None
• Alarm 1-4 any
• Alarm 1-4 HighHigh
• Alarm 1-4 High or HighHigh
• Alarm 1-4 High
• Alarm 1-4 Low
• Alarm 1-4 Low or LowLow
• Alarm 1-4 LowLow
Alarm 2 input source 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Communication → V1 X1-4 → V1 input select. → Alarm2

input src
Description Determines which discrete value will be transmitted as V1 alarm 2 status.
Selection • None
• Alarm 1-4 any
• Alarm 1-4 HighHigh
• Alarm 1-4 High or HighHigh
• Alarm 1-4 High
• Alarm 1-4 Low
• Alarm 1-4 Low or LowLow
• Alarm 1-4 LowLow
Endress+Hauser 239
Value percent selector 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Communication → V1 X1-4 → V1 input select. → Value

% select
Description Selects which value shall be transmitted as a 0..100% value in the V1 Z0/Z1 message.
Selection • None
• Tank level %
• Tank ullage %
• AIO B1-3 value % *
• AIO C1-3 value % *
This submenu is only present for devices with a "WM550" option communication
interface.

→ Configuration
Baudrate 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Communication → WM550 X1-4 → Configuration

→ Baudrate
Prerequisite Communication interface protocol (→  232) = "WM550" option
Description Defines the baud rate of the WM550 communication.
Selection • 600 BAUD

• 1200 BAUD
• 2400 BAUD
• 4800 BAUD
Factory setting 2400 BAUD
240 Endress+Hauser
WM550 address 

→ WM550 address
Description Describes the WM550 address of the device.
User entry 0 to 63
Factory setting 1
Software ID 

→ Software ID
Prerequisite Communication interface protocol (→  232) = "WM550" option
Description Defines content for WM550 Task 32.

Detailed information on content for WM550 Task 32, Special Documentation SD02567G.
User entry 0 to 9 999
Factory setting 2 000
"WM550 input selector" submenu

This submenu is only present for devices with a "WM550" option communication
interface.

→ WM550 inp select
Discrete 1 selector 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Communication → WM550 X1-4 → WM550 inp select
→ Discrete 1select
Description Determines the input source which is transferred as Alarm bit [n] value in the
corresponding WM550 tasks.
Selection • None
• Balance flag optionVisibility depends on order options or device settings
• Alarm 1...4 any
• Alarm 1...4 HighHigh
Endress+Hauser 241
• Alarm 1...4 High or HighHigh

• Alarm 1...4 High
• Alarm 1...4 Low
• Alarm 1...4 Low or LowLow
• Alarm 1...4 LowLow
• Digital Xx-x
242 Endress+Hauser
"HART output" submenu
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Communication → HART output

→ Configuration
System polling address 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Communication → HART output → Configuration

→ Polling address
Description Device address for HART communication.
User entry 0 to 63
Factory setting 15
No. of preambles 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Communication → HART output → Configuration → No.

of preambles
Description Defines the number of preambles in the HART telegram.
User entry 5 to 20
Factory setting 5
PV source 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Communication → HART output → Configuration → PV

source
Description Decides, if the PV configuration is according to an analog output (HART slave) or

customized (in case of HART tunneling only).
Endress+Hauser 243
Selection • AIO B1-3 *

• AIO C1-3 *
• Custom
Factory setting Custom
Assign PV 

→ Assign PV
Prerequisite PV source (→  243) = Custom
Description Assign measured variable to primary dynamic variable (PV).
Selection • None
• Tank level
• Tank ullage
• Measured level
• Distance
• Water level
• Bottom level
• Air temperature
• Average profile density
• Upper density
• Middle density
• Lower density
• P1 (bottom)
• P2 (middle)
• P3 (top)
• GP 1 value
• GP 2 value
• GP 3 value
• GP 4 value
Factory setting Tank level
244 Endress+Hauser
The Measured level option doesn't contain a unit. If a unit is needed, select the Tank
level option.
0 % value 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Communication → HART output → Configuration → 0 %

value
Prerequisite PV source = Custom
Description 0% value of the primary variable (PV).
100 % value 

→ 100 % value
Description 100% value of the primary variable (PV).
PV mA selector 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Communication → HART output → Configuration → PV

mA selector
Endress+Hauser 245
Description Assigns a current to the primary HART variable (PV).
Selection • None
• AIO B1-3 value mA *
• AIO C1-3 value mA *
Primary variable (PV)

→ Primary var (PV)
Description Shows the value of the primary HART variable (PV).
Write access -
Percent of range

→ Percent of range
Description Shows the value of the primary variable (PV) as a percentage of the defined 0% to 100%
range.
Write access -
Assign SV 

→ Assign SV
Description Assigns a tank variable to the secondary HART variable (SV).
Selection • None
• Tank level
• Tank ullage
246 Endress+Hauser
• Measured level
• Distance
• Water level
• Bottom level
• Air temperature
• Upper density
• Middle density
• Lower density
• P1 (bottom)
• P2 (middle)
• P3 (top)
• GP 1 value
• GP 2 value
• GP 3 value
• GP 4 value
Factory setting Liquid temperature
level option.
Secondary variable (SV)

→ Second.var(SV)
Prerequisite Assign SV (→  246) ≠ None
Description Shows the value of the secondary HART variable (SV).
Write access -
Endress+Hauser 247
Assign TV 

→ Assign TV
Description Assigns a tank variable to the third HART variable (TV).
Selection • None
• Tank level
• Tank ullage
• Measured level
• Distance
• Water level
• Bottom level
• Air temperature
• Upper density
• Middle density
• Lower density
• P1 (bottom)
• P2 (middle)
• P3 (top)
• GP 1 value
• GP 2 value
• GP 3 value
• GP 4 value
Factory setting Water level
level option.
Tertiary variable (TV)

→ Tertiary var(TV)
Prerequisite Assign TV (→  248) ≠ None
Description Shows the value of the third HART variable (TV).
248 Endress+Hauser
Write access -
Assign QV 

→ Assign QV
Description Assigns a tank variable to the fourth HART variable (QV).
Selection • None
• Tank level
• Tank ullage
• Measured level
• Distance
• Water level
• Bottom level
• Air temperature
• Upper density
• Middle density
• Lower density
• P1 (bottom)
• P2 (middle)
• P3 (top)
• GP 1 value
• GP 2 value
• GP 3 value
• GP 4 value
Factory setting Observed density value
level option.
Endress+Hauser 249
Quaternary variable (QV)

→ Quaterna.var(QV)
Prerequisite Assign QV (→  249) ≠ None
Description Shows the value of the fourth HART variable (QV).
Write access -
250 Endress+Hauser
"Information" submenu

→ Information
HART short tag 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Communication → HART output → Information → HART

short tag
Description Defines the short tag for the measuring point. Maximum length: 8 characters Allowed
characters: A-Z, 0-9, certain special characters.
Device tag 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Communication → HART output → Information → Device

tag
Description Enter a unique name for the measuring point to identify the device quickly within the
plant.
HART descriptor 

descriptor
Description User defined HART descriptor (16 characters).
Endress+Hauser 251
HART message 

message
Description User defined HART message (32 characters).
HART date code 

date code
Description Enter date of the last configuration change. Use this format yyyy-mm-dd.
Factory setting 2009-07-20
252 Endress+Hauser
"Application" submenu
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application
"Tank configuration" submenu
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank config
"Level" submenu
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank config → Level
Level source 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank config → Level → Level source
Description Defines the source of the level value.
Selection • No input value

• Level SR *
• Level *
• Displacer position *
• AIO B1-3 value *
• AIO C1-3 value *
• AIP B4-8 value *
• AIP C4-8 value *
Empty 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank config → Level → Empty
Description Distance from reference point to zero position (tank bottom or datum plate).
Endress+Hauser 253
The reference point is the reference line of the calibration window.
Tank reference height 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank config → Level → Tank ref height
Description Defines the distance from the dipping reference point to the zero position (tank bottom or
datum plate).
Tank level
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank config → Level → Tank level
surface.
Write access -
Set level 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank config → Level → Set level
Description If the level measured by the device does not match the actual level obtained by a manual
dip, enter the correct level into this parameter.
254 Endress+Hauser
The device adjusts the Empty parameter (→  187) according to the entered value, such
that the measured level will match the actual level.
Water level source 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank config → Level → Water level src
Description Defines the source of the bottom water level.

• Bottom level
• AIO B1-3 value
• AIO C1-3 value
• AIP B4-8 value
• AIP C4-8 value
Manual water level 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank config → Level → Man. water level
Prerequisite Water level source (→  255) = Manual value
Description Defines the manual value of the bottom water level.
Water level
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank config → Level → Water level
Description Shows the bottom water level.
Endress+Hauser 255
Write access -
256 Endress+Hauser
"Temperature" submenu

→ Temperature
Liquid temp source 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank config → Temperature → Liq temp
source
Description Defines source from which the liquid temperature is obtained.

• AIO B1-3 value
• AIO C1-3 value
• AIP B4-8 value
• AIP C4-8 value
Manual liquid temperature 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank config → Temperature → Man.

liquid temp
Prerequisite Liquid temp source (→  189) = Manual value
Description Defines the manual value of the liquid temperature.
Endress+Hauser 257
Liquid temperature
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank config → Temperature → Liquid

temp.
Description Shows the average or spot temperature of the measured liquid.
Write access -
Air temperature source 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank config → Temperature → Air temp.
source
Description Defines source from which the air temperature is obtained.

• AIO B1-3 value
• AIO C1-3 value
• AIP B4-8 value
• AIP C4-8 value
Manual air temperature 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank config → Temperature → Manual air
temp.
Prerequisite Air temperature source (→  258) = Manual value
Description Defines the manual value of the air temperature.
258 Endress+Hauser
Air temperature
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank config → Temperature → Air temp.
Description Shows the air temperature.
Write access -
Vapor temp source 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank config → Temperature → Vapor

temp src
Description Defines the source from which the vapor temperature is obtained.

• HART device 1 ... 15 vapor temp
• AIO B1-3 value
• AIO C1-3 value
• AIP B4-8 value
• AIP C4-8 value
Manual vapor temperature 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank config → Temperature → Man.

vapor temp.
Prerequisite Vapor temp source (→  259) = Manual value
Description Defines the manual value of the vapor temperature.
Endress+Hauser 259
Vapor temperature
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank config → Temperature → Vapor

temp.
Description Shows the measured vapor temperature.
Write access -
260 Endress+Hauser
"Density" submenu

→ Density
Observed density source 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank config → Density → Density source
Description Determines how the density is obtained.
Selection • HTG *
• HTMS *
• Average profile density *
• Upper density
• Middle density
• Lower density
Observed density
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank config → Density → Observed

density
Description Shows the measured or calculated density.
Write access -
Air density 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank config → Density → Air density
Description Defines the density of the air surrounding the tank.
Endress+Hauser 261
Vapor density 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank config → Density → Vapor density
Description Defines the density of the gas phase in the tank.
262 Endress+Hauser
"Pressure" submenu

→ Pressure
P1 (bottom) source 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank config → Pressure → P1 (bot) source
Description Defines the source of the bottom pressure (P1).

• HART device 1 ... 15 pressure
• AIO B1-3 value
• AIO C1-3 value
• AIP B4-8 value
• AIP C4-8 value
P1 (bottom)
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank config → Pressure → P1 (bottom)
Description Shows the pressure at the tank bottom.
Write access -
P1 (bottom) manual pressure 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank config → Pressure → P1 (bot)

manual
Prerequisite P1 (bottom) source (→  263) = Manual value
Description Defines the manual value of the bottom pressure (P1).
User entry –25 to 25 bar
Factory setting 0 bar
Endress+Hauser 263
P1 position 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank config → Pressure → P1 position
Description Defines the position of the bottom pressure transmitter (P1), measured from zero position
(tank bottom or datum plate).
P1 offset 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank config → Pressure → P1 offset
Description Offset for the bottom pressure (P1). The offset is added to the measured pressure prior to
any tank calculation.
User entry –25 to 25 bar
P1 absolute / gauge 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank config → Pressure → P1 absolut/

gauge
Description Defines whether the connected pressure transmitter measures an absolute or a gauge
pressure.
Selection • Absolute
• Gauge
Factory setting Gauge
264 Endress+Hauser
P3 (top) source 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank config → Pressure → P3 (top) source
Description Defines the source of the top pressure (P3).

• HART device 1 ... 15 pressure
• AIO B1-3 value
• AIO C1-3 value
• AIP B4-8 value
• AIP C4-8 value
P3 (top)
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank config → Pressure → P3 (top)
Description Shows the pressure (P3) at the top transmitter.
Write access -
P3 (top) manual pressure 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank config → Pressure → P3 (top)

manual
Prerequisite P3 (top) source (→  265) = Manual value
Description Defines the manual value of the top pressure (P3).
User entry –2.5 to 2.5 bar
Endress+Hauser 265
P3 position 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank config → Pressure → P3 position
Description Defines the position of the top pressure transmitter (P3), measured from zero position
(tank bottom or datum plate).
User entry 0 to 100 000 mm
P3 offset 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank config → Pressure → P3 offset
Description Offset for the top pressure (P3). The offset is added to the measured pressure prior to any
tank calculation.
User entry –2.5 to 2.5 bar
P3 absolute / gauge 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank config → Pressure → P3 absolut/

gauge
Description Defines whether the connected pressure transmitter measures an absolute or a gauge
pressure.
Selection • Absolute
• Gauge
Factory setting Gauge
266 Endress+Hauser
Ambient pressure 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank config → Pressure → Ambient

pressure
Description Defines the manual value of the ambient pressure.
User entry 0 to 2.5 bar
Endress+Hauser 267
"Tank calculation" submenu
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank calculation
"HyTD" submenu
Overview
Hydrostatic Tank Deformation can be used to compensate the vertical movement of the
Gauge Reference Height (GRH) due to bulging of the tank shell caused by the hydrostatic
pressure exerted by the liquid stored in the tank. The compensation is based on a linear
approximation obtained from manual hand dips at several levels distributed over the full
range of the tank.
C
D
A
A0030164
 89 Correction of the hydrostatic tank deformation (HyTD)

A "Distance" (level below L0 → "HyTD correction value" = 0)
B Gauge Reference Height (GRH)
C HyTD correction value
D "Distance" (level above L0 → "HyTD correction value" > 0)
268 Endress+Hauser
Linear approximation of the HyTD correction

The real amount of deformation varies non-linearly with the level due to the construction
of the tank. However, as the correction values are typically small compared to the
measured level, a simple straight line method can be used with good results.
H 1
3 L
L0
A0028724
 90 Calculation of the HyTD correction

1 Linear correction according to "Deformation factor (→  271)"
2 Real correction
3 Starting level (→  270)
L Measured level
H HyTD correction value (→  270)
Calculation of the HyTD correction
L < L0 = CHyTD = 0
L > L0 = CHyTD = - (L - L0) x D
A0028715
L Measured level
L0 Starting level
cHyTD HyTD correction value
D Deformation factor
Endress+Hauser 269
Description of parameters

→ HyTD
HyTD correction value
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank calculation → HyTD → HyTD corr.
value
Description Shows the correction value from the Hydrostatic Tank Deformation.
Write access -
HyTD mode 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank calculation → HyTD → HyTD mode
Description Activates or deactivates the calculation of the Hydrostatic Tank Deformation.
Selection • No
• Yes
Factory setting No
Starting level 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank calculation → HyTD → Starting level
Description Defines the starting level for the Hydrostatic Tank Deformation. Levels below this value
are not corrected.
270 Endress+Hauser
Deformation factor 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank calculation → HyTD → Deform factor
Description Defines the deformation factor for the HyTD (change of device position per change of
level).
User entry –1.0 to 1.0 %
Factory setting 0.2 %
Endress+Hauser 271
"CTSh" submenu
Overview
CTSh (correction for the thermal expansion of the tank shell) compensates for effects on
the Gauge Reference Height (GRH) and on the expansion or contraction of the measuring
wire due to temperature effects on the tank shell or stilling well. The temperature effects
are separated into two parts, respectively affecting the 'dry' and 'wetted' part of the tank
shell or stilling well. The correction function is based on thermal expansion coefficients of
steel and insulation factors for both the 'dry' and 'wet' parts of the wire and the tank shell.
The temperatures used for the correction can be selected from on manual or measured
values.
This correction is recommended for the following situations:
• if the operating temperature deviates considederably from the temperature during
calibration (ΔT > 10 °C (18 °F))
• for extremely high tanks
• for refrigerated, cryogenic or heated applications
As the use of this correction will influence the innage level reading, it is
recommended to ensure the manual hand dip and level verification procedures are
being conducted correctly before enabling this correction method.
This mode cannot be used in conjunction with HTG because the level is not measured
relative to the gauge reference height with HTG.
272 Endress+Hauser
CTSh: Calculation of the wall temperature
TA
TV
SD
TD
TRH
E
TW
L
TP
A0028713
 91 Parameters for the CTSh calculation
TW Temperature of the wetted part of the tank shell
TD Temperature of the dry part of the tank shell
TP Product temperature
TV Vapor temperature (in the tank)
TA Ambient temperature (atmosphere surrounding the tank)
Sd Measured distance (Empty to Level)
TRH Tank reference height
E Empty
L Level
CTSh: Calculation of the wall temperature

Depending on the parameters Covered tank (→  275) and Stilling well (→  276),
the temperatures TW of the wetted and TD of the dry part of the tank wall are calculated as
follows:
Covered tank (→  275) Stilling well (→  276) TW TD

1)
Yes TP TV
Covered
No (7/8) TP + (1/8) TA (1/2) TV + (1/2) TA
Yes TP TA
Open top
No (7/8) TP + (1/8) TA TA
1) This option is also valid for insulated tanks without a stilling welll. This is due to the temperature inside
and outside of the tank shell being the same due to the insulation of the tank.
Endress+Hauser 273
1 2 3 4 5
A0030509
1 Covered tank (→  275) = Covered; Stilling well (→  276) = Yes

2 Covered tank (→  275) = Covered; Stilling well (→  276) = No
3 Covered tank (→  275) = Open top; Stilling well (→  276) = Yes
4 Covered tank (→  275) = Open top; Stilling well (→  276) = No
5 Insulated tank: Covered tank (→  275) = Open top; Stilling well (→  276) = Yes
CTSh: Calculation of the correction
CCTSh = αtank (TRH - L)(TD - Tcal) + αtank L (TW - Tcal) - αwire SD (Tv - Tcal)
A0030497
TRH Tank reference height
L Level
TD Temperature of the dry part of the tank shell (calculated from TP, TV and TA)
TW Temperature of the wetted part of the tank shell (calculated from TP, TV and TA)
Tcal Temperature at which the measurement has been calibrated
αtank Linear expansion coefficient of tank
αwire Linear expansion coefficient of wire
cCTSh CTSh correction value
274 Endress+Hauser

→ CTSh
CTSh correction value
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank calculation → CTSh → CTSh corr
value
Description Shows the CTSh correction value.
Write access -
CTSh mode 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank calculation → CTSh → CTSh mode
Description Activates or deactivates the CTSh.
Selection • No
• Yes
• With wire *
• Only wire *
Factory setting No
Covered tank 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank calculation → CTSh → Covered tank
Description Determines whether the tank is covered.
Selection • Open top

• Covered
Factory setting Open top
Endress+Hauser 275
The Covered option is only valid for fixed tank roofs. For a floating roof select Open
top.
Stilling well 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank calculation → CTSh → Stilling well
Description Determines whether the device is mounted on a stilling well.
Selection • No
• Yes
Factory setting No
Calibration temperature 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank calculation → CTSh → Calibration

temp
Description Specify temperature at which the measurement has been calibrated.
Linear expansion coefficient 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank calculation → CTSh → Linear exp
coeff
Description Defines the linear expansion coefficient of the tank shell material.
User entry 0 to 100 ppm
Factory setting 15 ppm
276 Endress+Hauser
Wire expansion coefficient 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank calculation → CTSh → Wire exp
coeff
Description Defines the expansion coefficient of the wire material of the drum. Value is programmed
in factory.
User entry 0 to 100 ppm
Factory setting 15 ppm
Endress+Hauser 277
"HTMS" submenu
Overview
The Hybrid Tank Measurement System (HTMS) is a method to calculate the density of a
product in a tank based on both a (top mounted) level and at least one (bottom mounted)
pressure measurement. An additional pressure sensor can be installed at the top of the
tank to provide information about the vapor pressure and to make the density calculation
more accurate. The calculation method also takes into account a possible level of water at
the bottom of the tank to make density calculations as accurate as possible.
HTMS parameters
P3
ρA
ρV
g
A
HP3
ρP ΔP
LP
B
P1 V
LW
HP1
A0030498
 92 HTMS parameters
A Product
B Water
Parameter Navigation path
P1 (Bottom pressure) Setup → Advanced setup → Tank configuration → Pressure → P1 (bottom)
HP1 (Position of P1 transmitter) Setup → Advanced setup → Tank configuration → Pressure → P1 position
P3 (Top pressure) Setup → Advanced setup → Tank configuration → Pressure → P3 (top)
HP3 (Position of P3 transmitter) Setup → Advanced setup → Tank configuration → Pressure → P3 position
1)
ρP (Density of the product ) • Measured value: Setup → Advanced setup → Calculation → HTMS → Density value
• User-defined value: Setup → Advanced setup → Calculation → HTMS → Manual upper density
ρV (Vapor density) Expert → Application → Tank configuration → Density → Vapor density
ρA (Ambient air temperature) Setup → Advanced setup → Tank configuration → Density → Air density
g (Local gravity) Expert → Application → Tank Calculation → Local gravity
Lp (Level of the product) Operation → Tank level
LW (Bottom water level) Operation → Water level
V = LW - HP1
ΔP = LP - LW = LP - V - HP1
1) Depending on the situation this parameter is measured or a user-defined value is used.
278 Endress+Hauser
HTMS modes
Two HTMS modes can be selected in the HTMS mode parameter (→  280). The mode
determines whether one or two pressure values are used. Depending on the selected mode
a number of additional parameters are required for the calculation of the product density.
The HTMS P1+P3 option must be used in pressurized tanks in order to compensate
for the pressure of the vapor phase.
HTMS mode Measured variables Required additional parameters Calculated variables

(→  280)
HTMS P1 • P1 • g ρP
• LP • HP1
• LW (optional)
HTMS P1+P3 • P1 • ρV ρP
• P3 • ρA (more precise calculation
• LP • g for pressurized tanks)
• HP1
• HP3
• LW (optional)
Minimum level
The density of the product can only be calculated if the product has a minimum thickness :
ΔP ≥ ΔP, min
A0028864
This is equivalent to the following condition for the product level:
LP - V ³ D P ,min + H P1 = Lmin
A0028863
Lmin is defined in the Minimum level parameter (→  281). As can be seen from the
formula it always must be bigger than HP1.
If LP - V falls below this limit, the density is calculated as follows:
• If a previous calculated value is available, this value will be kept as long as no new
calculation is possible.
• If no value was previously calculated, the manual value (defined in the Manual upper
density parameter) will be used.
Hysteresis
The level of the product in a tank is not constant but slightly varies, due for example to
filling disturbances. If the level oscillates around the changeover level (Minimum level
(→  281)), the algorithm will constantly switch between calculating the value and
holding the previous result. To avoid this effect a positional hysteresis is defined around
the changeover point.
Endress+Hauser 279
Hr
Lmin
2
A0029148
 93 HTMS hysteresis
1 Value calculated
2 Value held/manual
Lmin Minimum level (→  281)
Hr Hysteresis (→  282)

→ HTMS
HTMS mode 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank calculation → HTMS → HTMS mode
Description Defines the HTMS mode. Depending on the mode one or two pressure transmitters are
used.
Selection • HTMS P1
• HTMS P1+P3
Factory setting HTMS P1

• HTMS P1
Only a bottom pressure transmitter (P1) is used.
• HTMS P1+P3
A bottom (P1) and top (P3) pressure transmitter are used. This option should be selected
for pressurized tanks.
Manual density 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank calculation → HTMS → Manual

density
Description Defines the manual density.
280 Endress+Hauser
Density value
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank calculation → HTMS → Density value
Description Shows the calculated product density.
Write access -
Minimum level 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank calculation → HTMS → Min. level
Description Defines the minimum product level for a HTMS calculation. If Lp - V falls below the limit
defined in this parameter, the density retains its last value or the manual value is used
instead.
Minimum pressure 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank calculation → HTMS → Min.

pressure
Description Defines the minimum pressure for a HTMS calculation. If the pressure P1 (or the
difference P1 - P3) falls below the limit defined in this parameter, the density retains its
last value or the manual value is used instead.
User entry 0 to 100 bar
Factory setting 0.1 bar
Endress+Hauser 281
Safety distance 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank calculation → HTMS → Safety

distance
Description Defines the minimum level which must be present above the bottom pressure sensor
before its signal is used for the calculation.
Hysteresis 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank calculation → HTMS → Hysteresis
Description Defines the hysteresis for the HTMS calculation. Prevents constant switching if the level is
near the switch-over point.
Water density 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Tank calculation → HTMS → Water

density
Description Density of the water in the tank.
282 Endress+Hauser
"Alarm" submenu
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Alarm
"Alarm" submenu
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Alarm → Alarm
‣ Alarm
Alarm mode →  284
Error value →  285
Alarm value source →  286
Alarm value →  287
HH alarm value →  287
H alarm value →  287
L alarm value →  288
LL alarm value →  288
HH alarm →  288
H alarm →  289
HH+H alarm →  289
L alarm →  289
LL alarm →  289
LL+L alarm →  290
Any error →  290
Clear alarm →  290
Endress+Hauser 283
Alarm hysteresis →  291
Alarm mode 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Alarm → Alarm → Alarm mode
Description Defines the alarm mode of the selected alarm.
Selection • Off
• On
• Latching
Factory setting Off

• Off
No alarms are generated.
• On
An alarm disappears if the alarm condition is no longer present (taking into
consideration the hysteresis).
• Latching
All alarms remain active until the user selects Clear alarm (→  290) = Yes or the
power is switched off and on.
284 Endress+Hauser
A B
10 10
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
A0029539
 94 Principle of the limit evaluation

A Alarm mode (→  284) = On
B Alarm mode (→  284) = Latching
1 HH alarm value (→  287)
2 H alarm value (→  287)
3 L alarm value (→  288)
4 LL alarm value (→  288)
5 HH alarm (→  288)
6 H alarm (→  289)
7 L alarm (→  289)
8 LL alarm (→  289)
9 "Clear alarm (→  290)" = "Yes" or power off-on
10 Hysteresis (→  291)
Error value 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Alarm → Alarm → Error value
Prerequisite Alarm mode (→  284) ≠ Off
Description Defines the alarm to be issued if the input value is invalid.
Selection • No alarm
• HH+H alarm
• H alarm
• L alarm
• LL+L alarm
• All alarms
Factory setting All alarms
Endress+Hauser 285
Alarm value source 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Alarm → Alarm → Alarm source
Description Determines the process variable to be monitored.
Selection • Tank level

• Water level
• P1 (bottom)
• P2 (middle)
• P3 (top)
• Volume
• Flow velocity
• Volume flow
• Vapor density
• Middle density
• Upper density
• Correction
• Tank level %
• GP 1...4 value
• Measured level
• P3 position
• Local gravity
• P1 position
• Manual density
• Tank ullage
• Lower density
• Bottom level
• HART device 1...15 PV
• HART device 1...15 SV
• HART device 1...15 TV
• HART device 1...15 QV
• HART device 1...15 PV mA
• HART device 1...15 PV %
• Element temperature 1...24
• AIO B1-3 value
• AIO C1-3 value
• AIP B4-8 value
• AIP C4-8 value
• None
286 Endress+Hauser
Alarm value
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Alarm → Alarm → Alarm value
Description Shows the current value of the process variable being monitored.
User interface Signed floating-point number
Factory setting 0 None
Write access -
HH alarm value 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Alarm → Alarm → HH alarm value
Description Defines the high-high(HH) limit value.
H alarm value 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Alarm → Alarm → H alarm value
Description Defines the high(H) limit value.
Endress+Hauser 287
L alarm value 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Alarm → Alarm → L alarm value
Description Defines the low limit value.
LL alarm value 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Alarm → Alarm → LL alarm value
Description Defines the low-low(LL) limit value.
HH alarm
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Alarm → Alarm → HH alarm
Description Shows whether an HH alarm is currently active.
Write access -
288 Endress+Hauser
H alarm
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Alarm → Alarm → H alarm
Description Shows whether an H alarm is currently active.
Write access -
HH+H alarm
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Alarm → Alarm → HH+H alarm
Description Shows whether an HH or H alarm is currently active.
Write access -
L alarm
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Alarm → Alarm → L alarm
Description Shows whether an L alarm is currently active.
Write access -
LL alarm
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Alarm → Alarm → LL alarm
Description Shows whether an LL alarm is currently active.
Endress+Hauser 289
Write access -
LL+L alarm
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Alarm → Alarm → LL+L alarm
Description Shows whether an LL or L alarm is currently active.
Write access -
Any error
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Alarm → Alarm → Any error
Description Show whether any alarm is currently active.
User interface • Unknown

• Inactive
• Active
• Error
Factory setting Unknown
Write access -
Clear alarm 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Alarm → Alarm → Clear alarm
Prerequisite Alarm mode (→  284) = Latching
Description Deletes an alarm which is still active although the alarm condition is no longer present.
Selection • No
• Yes
Factory setting No
290 Endress+Hauser
Alarm hysteresis 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Alarm → Alarm → Alarm hysteresis
Description Defines the hysteresis for the limit values. The hystersis prevents constant changes of the
alarm state if the level is near one of the limit values.
Factory setting 0.001
Damping factor 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Application → Alarm → Alarm → Damping factor
Factory setting 0s
Endress+Hauser 291
"Safety settings" submenu
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Safety settings
Output out of range 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Safety settings → Output out range
Description Selection of behavior between Alarm or Last valid value when displacer reached
HighStoplevel, LowStopLevel or ReferencePosition.
Selection • Last valid value

• Alarm
• None
Factory setting Last valid value
Output out of range 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Safety settings → Output out range
Description Selection of behavior when displacer reached High stop level (→  188), Low stop level
or Reference position.
Selection • Last valid value

• Alarm
• None
Factory setting Last valid value
High stop level 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Safety settings → High stop level
Description Position of the displacer high stop as measured from defined zero position (tank bottom or
datum plate).
User entry –999 999.9 to 999 999.9 mm
292 Endress+Hauser
Low stop level 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Safety settings → Low stop level
Description Position of the displacer low stop as measured from defined zero position (tank bottom or
datum plate).
User entry –999 999.9 to 999 999.9 mm
Slow hoist zone 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Safety settings → Slow hoist zone
Description Defines the interval in millimeters, measured down from the Reference Position, in which
the Displacer reduces moving speed.
Overtension weight 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Safety settings → Overtension wgt
Description Sets the minimum Weight in grams when Overtension Alarm will be set.
Factory setting 350 g
Endress+Hauser 293
Undertension weight 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Safety settings → Undertension wgt
Description Defines the undertension error weight. Untertension error will be issued if displacer
weight is below this value longer than 7 seconds.
User entry 0 to 300 g
Factory setting 10 g
294 Endress+Hauser
"Sensor config" submenu
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Sensor config
Post gauge command 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Sensor config → Post gauge cmd
Description Defines the gauge command that will be executed after a one-time gauge command has
finished.
Selection • Stop
• Level
• Up
• Upper I/F level
• Lower I/F level
• None
Factory setting Level
Endress+Hauser 295
"Displacer" submenu
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Sensor config → Displacer
Displacer type 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Sensor config → Displacer → Displacer type
Description Chooses the type of displacer used.
Selection • Custom diameter

• Diameter 30 mm
• Diameter 50 mm
• Diameter 70 mm
• Diameter 110 mm
Displacer diameter 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Sensor config → Displacer → Displacer diamet
Prerequisite Displacer type (→  296) = Custom diameter
Description Sets the diameter of the cylindrical part of displacer.
User entry 0 to 999.9 mm
Factory setting See label on the device.
Displacer weight 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Sensor config → Displacer → Displacer weight
Description Set the weight of the diplacer in air. Indicated on the displacer in grams.
296 Endress+Hauser
Displacer volume 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Sensor config → Displacer → Displacer volume
Description Displacer volume indicated on displacer in mililiter.
User entry 10 to 999.9 ml
Displacer balance volume 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Sensor config → Displacer → Balance volume
Description Defines the balance volume of the displacer as the lower part of displacer immersed in
liquid. Units in milliliters. Indicated on displacer.
User entry 10 to 999.9 ml
Displacer height 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Sensor config → Displacer → Displacer height
Description Sets the displacer height in mm. Used for density measurement as minimum distance
between last profile point and liquid level.
User entry 10 to 300 mm
Endress+Hauser 297
Immersion depth 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Sensor config → Displacer → Immersion depth
Description Defines distance (mm) from displacer bottom to balancing line defined by balanced
volume. Value is needed for correct bottom level measurement.
298 Endress+Hauser
"Wiredrum" submenu
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Sensor config → Wiredrum
Drum circumference 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Sensor config → Wiredrum → Drum circumfer
Description Sets the circumference of the wire drum. Indicated in Label.
Wire weight 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Sensor config → Wiredrum → Wire weight
Description Defines the weight of the measuring wire in g/10m. Indicated on Label.
Endress+Hauser 299
"Spot density" submenu
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Sensor config → Spot density
Upper density offset 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Sensor config → Spot density → Up dens. offset
Description Defines an offset value which is added to the measured upper density value.
User entry –999.99 to 999.99 kg/m³
Middle density offset 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Sensor config → Spot density → Mid dens. offset
Description Defines an Offset Value which is added to the measured Middle Density Value.
Lower density offset 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Sensor config → Spot density → Low dens. offset
Description Defines an offset value which is added to the measured lower density value.
300 Endress+Hauser
Submersion depth 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Sensor config → Spot density → Submersion depth
Description Sets the displacer submersion depth (mm) for spot density operations.
Endress+Hauser 301
"Profile density" submenu
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Sensor config → Profile density
Density measurement mode 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Sensor config → Profile density → Density mode
Description In normal measure mode, measures at specified positions. In compensation mode

measures using next integer value of drum turns to improve accuracy.
Selection • Normal measure mode

Factory setting Normal measure mode
In normal mode, measures spot densities at requested positions. In compensations

mode the Proservo measures the spot densities at multiples of the wiredrum
circumference (e.g. every ~ 150 mm (5.91 in))
Manual profile level 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Sensor config → Profile density → Man profile lvl
Description Sets the level position in the tank where the manual profile density operation starts.
User entry –999 999.9 to 999 999.9 mm
Profile density offset distance 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Sensor config → Profile density → Dens offset dist
Description Profile density offset distance [mm] is the distance between start point and first
measurement point.
302 Endress+Hauser
Profile density interval 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Sensor config → Profile density → Density interval
Description Sets the interval between two measurement points in profile density operation.
Profile density offset 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Sensor config → Profile density → Prof dens offset
Description Defines an offset value which is added to the measured profile density value.
Endress+Hauser 303
"Display" submenu
This menu is only visible if the device has a local display.
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Display
Language
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Display → Language
Prerequisite The device has a local display.
Description Set display language.
Selection • English
• Deutsch
• русский язык (Russian)
• 日本語 (Japanese)
Factory setting English
Format display
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Display → Format display
Description Select how measured values are shown on the display.
Selection • 1 value, max. size

• 1 bargraph + 1 value
• 2 values
• 1 value large + 2 values
• 4 values
Factory setting 2 values
Additional information
4841.000
1 Â mm
A0019963
 95 "Format display" = "1 value, max. size"
304 Endress+Hauser
1 Â
93.5 %
1 Â 159.0
mm
A0019964
 96 "Format display" = "1 bargraph + 1 value"
1 Â 93.5
%
1 Â 159.0
mm
A0019965
 97 "Format display" = "2 values"
1 Â 159.0 mm
V 1 Â 23.5 V
1 Â 93.5
%
A0019966
 98 "Format display" = "1 value large + 2 values"
1 Â 93.5 %
1 Â 159.0 mm
V 1 Â 93.5 V
1 Â 26.3 °C
A0019968
 99 "Format display" = "4 values"
• The Value 1 to 4 display (→  305) parameters specify which measured values are
shown on the display and in which order.
• If more measured values are specified than the current display mode permits, the values
alternate on the device display. The display time until the next change is configured in
the Display interval parameter (→  308).
Value 1 to 4 display 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Display → Value 1 display
Endress+Hauser 305
Description Select the measured value that is shown on the local display.
Selection • None 9)
• Tank level
• Measured level
• Tank level %
• Water level 9)
• Liquid temperature 9)
• Vapor temperature 9)
• Air temperature 9)
• Tank ullage
• Tank ullage %
• Observed density value 9)
• P1 (bottom) 9)
• P2 (middle) 9)
• P3 (top) 9)
• GP 1 value 9)
• GP 2 value 9)
• GP 3 value 9)
• GP 4 value 9)
• Gauge command 9)
• Gauge status 9)
• AIO B1-3 value 9)
• AIO B1-3 value mA 9)
• AIO B1-3 value % 9)
• AIO C1-3 value 9)
• AIO C1-3 value mA 9)
• AIO C1-3 value % 9)
• AIP B4-8 value 9)
• AIP B4-8 value mA 9)
• AIP B4-8 value % 9)
• AIP C4-8 value 9)
• AIP C4-8 value mA 9)
• AIP C4-8 value % 9)
Factory setting Depending on device version
Decimal places 1 to 4 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Display → Decimal places 1
Description This selection does not affect the measurement and calculation accuracy of the device.
9) not available for the Value 1 display parameter
306 Endress+Hauser
Selection •x
• x.x
• x.xx
• x.xxx
• x.xxxx
Factory setting x.x
Additional information The setting does not affect the measuring or computational accuracy of the device.
Separator 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Display → Separator
Description Select decimal separator for displaying numerical values.
Selection •.
•,
Factory setting .
Number format 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Display → Number format
Description Choose number format for the display.
Selection • Decimal
• ft-in-1/16''
Factory setting Decimal
The ft-in-1/16'' option is only valid for distance values.
Endress+Hauser 307
Header 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Display → Header
Description Select header contents on local display.
Selection • Device tag

• Free text
Factory setting Device tag

• Device tag
The header contents is defined in the Device tag parameter (→  184).
• Free text
The header contents is defined in the Header text parameter (→  308).
Header text 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Display → Header text
Prerequisite Header (→  308) = Free text
Description Enter display header text.
Factory setting TG-Platform
Display interval
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Display → Display interval
Description Set time measured values are shown on display if display alternates between values.
User entry 1 to 10 s
Factory setting 5s
Additional information This parameter is only relevant if the number of selected measuring values exceeds
the number of values the selected display format can display simultaneously.
308 Endress+Hauser
Display damping 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Display → Display damping
Description Set display reaction time to fluctuations in the measured value.
User entry 0.0 to 999.9 s
Factory setting 0.0 s
Backlight
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Display → Backlight
Description Switch the local display backlight on and off.
Selection • Disable
• Enable
Factory setting Enable
Contrast display
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Display → Contrast display
Description Adjust local display contrast setting to ambient conditions (e.g. lighting or reading angle).
User entry 20 to 80 %
Endress+Hauser 309
Factory setting 30 %
310 Endress+Hauser
"System units" submenu
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → System units
Units preset 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → System units → Units preset
Description Defines a set of units for length, pressure and temperature.
Selection • mm, bar, °C

• m, bar, °C
• mm, PSI, °C
• ft, PSI, °F
• Customer value
Factory setting mm, bar, °C
If the Customer value option is selected, the units are defined in the following
parameters. In any other case these are read-only parameters used to indicate the
respective unit:
• Distance unit (→  311)
• Pressure unit (→  312)
• Temperature unit (→  312)
Distance unit 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → System units → Distance unit
Description Select distance unit.
Selection SI units US units

•m • ft
• mm • in
• cm • ft-in-16
• ft-in-8
Factory setting mm
Write access Maintenance (if Units preset (→  184) = Customer value)
Endress+Hauser 311
Pressure unit 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → System units → Pressure unit
Description Select process pressure unit.
Selection SI units US units Other units

• bar psi • inH2O
• Pa • inH2O (68°F)
• kPa • ftH2O (68°F)
• MPa • mmH2O
• mbar a • mmHg
Factory setting bar
Temperature unit 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → System units → Temperature unit
Description Select temperature unit.
Selection SI units US units

• °C • °F
•K • °R
Factory setting °C
Density unit 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → System units → Density unit
Description Select density unit.
Selection SI units US units Other units

• g/cm³ • lb/ft³ • °API
• g/ml • lb/gal (us) • SGU
• g/l • lb/in³
• kg/l • STon/yd³
• kg/dm³
• kg/m³
Factory setting kg/m³
312 Endress+Hauser
Endress+Hauser 313
"Date / time" submenu
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Date / time
Date/time
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Date / time → Date/time
Description Displays the device internal real time clock.
Write access -
Set date 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Date / time → Set date
Description Controls the setting of the real-time clock.
Selection • Please select

• Abort
• Start
• Confirm time
Factory setting Please select

• Please select
Prompts the user to select an action.
• Abort
Discards the entered date and time.
• Start
Starts the setting of the real time clock.
• Confirm time
Sets the real-time clock to the entered date and time.
Year 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Date / time → Year
Prerequisite Set date (→  314) = Start
314 Endress+Hauser
Description Enter the current year.
User entry 2 016 to 2 079
Factory setting 2 016
Month 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Date / time → Month
Description Enter the current month.
User entry 1 to 12
Factory setting 1
Day 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Date / time → Day
Description Enter the current day.
User entry 1 to 31
Factory setting 1
Hour 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Date / time → Hour
Endress+Hauser 315
Description Enter the current hour.
User entry 0 to 23
Factory setting 0
Minute 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Date / time → Minute
Description Enter the current minute.
User entry 0 to 59
Factory setting 0
316 Endress+Hauser
"SIL confirmation" wizard

• The SIL confirmation wizard is only available for devices with SIL or WHG approval
(Feature 590: "Additional Approval", option LA: "SIL" or LC: "WHG overfill
prevention" ) which are currently not in the SIL- or WHG-locked state.
• The SIL confirmation wizard is required to lock the device according to SIL or WHG.
For details refer to the "Functional Safety Manual" of the respective device, which
describes the locking procedure and the parameters of this wizard.
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → SIL confirmation
"Deactivate SIL/WHG" wizard

• The Deactivate SIL/WHG wizard is only available for devices with SIL or WHG
approval (Feature 590: "Additional Approval", option LA: "SIL" or LC: "WHG overfill
prevention" ) which are currently in the SIL- or WHG-locked state.
• The Deactivate SIL/WHG wizard is required to undo the locking of the device
according to SIL or WHG. For details refer to the "Functional Safety Manual" of the
respective device, which describes the locking procedure and the parameters of this
wizard.
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Deactiv. SIL/WHG
Endress+Hauser 317
"Administration" submenu
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Administration
Define access code 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Administration → Def. access code
Description Define release code for write access to parameters.
User entry 0 to 9 999
Factory setting 0
If the factory setting is not changed or 0 is defined as the access code, the parameters
are not write-protected and the configuration data of the device can then always be
modified. The user is logged on in the Maintenance role.
The write protection affects all parameters marked with the symbol in this
document.
Once the access code has been defined, write-protected parameters can only be
modified if the access code is entered in the Enter access code parameter
(→  199).
Device reset 
Navigation  Setup → Advanced setup → Administration → Device reset
Description Reset the device configuration - either entirely or in part - to a defined state.
Selection • Cancel
• To factory defaults
• Restart device
Factory setting Cancel
Additional information Meaning of the options

• Cancel
No action
• To factory defaults
All parameters are reset to the order-code specific factory setting.
• Restart device
The restart resets every parameter which is stored in the volatile memory (RAM) to the
factory setting (e.g. measured value data). The device configuration remains unchanged.
318 Endress+Hauser
Endress+Hauser 319
15.4 "Diagnostics" menu

Navigation  Diagnostics
Actual diagnostics
Navigation  Diagnostics → Actual diagnos.
Description Shows the current occured diagnostic event along with its diagnostic information.
Write access -
The display consists of:

• Symbol for event behavior
• Code for diagnostic behavior
• Operating time of occurrence
• Event text
If several messages are active at the same time, the messages with the highest
priority is displayed.
Information on what is causing the message, and remedy measures, can be viewed via
the symbol on the display.
Timestamp
Navigation  Diagnostics → Timestamp
Description Displays the timestamp for the currently active diagnostic message.
Write access -
Previous diagnostics
Navigation  Diagnostics → Prev.diagnostics
Description Shows the diagnostic event that occurred prior to the current diagnostic event along with
its diagnostic information.
Write access -
320 Endress+Hauser
The display consists of:

• Event text
If several messages are active at the same time, the messages with the highest
priority is displayed.
Information on what is causing the message, and remedy measures, can be viewed via
the symbol on the display.
Timestamp
Navigation  Diagnostics → Timestamp
Description Shows the timestamp of the previous diagnostic message.
Write access -
Operating time from restart
Navigation  Diagnostics → Time fr. restart
Description Shows the time the device has been in operation since the last device restart.
Write access -
Operating time
Navigation  Diagnostics → Operating time
Description Indicates how long the device has been in operation.
Write access -
Endress+Hauser 321
Date/time
Navigation  Diagnostics → Date/time
Description Displays the device internal real time clock.
Write access -
322 Endress+Hauser
15.4.1 "Diagnostic list" submenu
Navigation  Diagnostics → Diagnostic list
Diagnostics 1 to 5
Navigation  Diagnostics → Diagnostic list → Diagnostics 1 to 5
Description Display the current diagnostics messages with the highest to fifth-highest priority.
Additional information The display consists of:

• Event text
Timestamp 1 to 5
Navigation  Diagnostics → Diagnostic list → Timestamp
Description Timestamp of the diagnostic message.
Endress+Hauser 323
15.4.2 "Device information" submenu
Navigation  Diagnostics → Device info
Device tag
Navigation  Diagnostics → Device info → Device tag
Description Shows the device tag.
Write access -
Serial number
Navigation  Diagnostics → Device info → Serial number
Description The serial number is a unique alphanumerical code identifying the device. It is printed on
the nameplate. In combination with the Operations app it allows to access all device
related documentation.
Write access -
Firmware version
Navigation  Diagnostics → Device info → Firmware version
Description Shows the device firmware version installed.
Write access -
Firmware CRC
Navigation  Diagnostics → Device info → Firmware CRC
Description Result of the cyclic redundancy check of the firmware.
324 Endress+Hauser
Write access -
Weight and measures configuration CRC
Navigation  Diagnostics → Device info → W&M config CRC
Description Result of the cyclic redundancy check of the weights and measure relevant parameters.
Write access -
Device name
Navigation  Diagnostics → Device info → Device name
Description Use this function to display the device name. It can also be found on the nameplate.
Write access -
Order code 
Navigation  Diagnostics → Device info → Order code
Description Shows the device order code.
Write access Service
Extended order code 1 to 3 
Navigation  Diagnostics → Device info → Ext. order cd. 1
Description Display the three parts of the extended order code.
Write access Service
Endress+Hauser 325
The extended order code indicates the selected option of all ordering features and thus
uniquely identifies the device.
326 Endress+Hauser
15.4.3 "Simulation" submenu
Navigation  Diagnostics → Simulation
Device alarm simulation 
Navigation  Diagnostics → Simulation → Dev. alarm sim.
Description Switch the device alarm on and off.
Selection • Off
• On
Factory setting Off
Diagnostic event simulation 
Navigation  Diagnostics → Simulation → Diag. event sim.
Description Select a diagnostic event to simulate this event.
Selection The diagnostic events of the device
Factory setting Off
To terminate the simulation, select Off.
Simulation distance on 
Navigation  Diagnostics → Simulation → Sim distance on
Description Switches the distance simulation on or off.
Selection • Off
• On
Endress+Hauser 327
Factory setting Off
Simulation distance 
Navigation  Diagnostics → Simulation → Sim distance
Prerequisite Simulation distance on (→  327) = On
Description Defines the distance value to be simulated.
Current output simulation 
Navigation  Diagnostics → Simulation → Curr.out. 1 sim.

 Diagnostics → Simulation → Curr.out. 2 sim.
Prerequisite • The device has an Anlog I/O module.

• Operating mode (→  213) = 4..20mA output or HART slave +4..20mA output
Description Switches the simulation of the current on or off.
Selection • Off
• On
Factory setting Off
Simulation value 
Navigation  Diagnostics → Simulation → Simulation value

 Diagnostics → Simulation → Simulation value
Prerequisite Current output simulation (→  328) = On
328 Endress+Hauser
Description Defines the current to be simulated.
User entry 3.4 to 23 mA
Factory setting The current at the time the simulation was started.
Endress+Hauser 329
15.4.4 "Device check" submenu
Navigation  Diagnostics → Device check
Result drum check
Navigation  Diagnostics → Device check → Result drum chk
Description Gives feedback on the latest status of the commissioning check.
Write access -
330 Endress+Hauser
"Commissioning check" wizard
Navigation  Diagnostics → Device check → Commission check
Commissioning check 
Navigation  Diagnostics → Device check → Commission check → Commission check
Description This sequence supports checking of the hardware on sensor side and correct installation of
the sensor.
Result drum check
Navigation  Diagnostics → Device check → Commission check → Result drum chk
Description Gives feedback on the latest status of the commissioning check.
Write access -
Step X / 11
Navigation  Diagnostics → Device check → Commission check → Step X / 11
Description Indicates which step of the commissioning check is currently running.
Write access -
Endress+Hauser 331
Index Proservo NMS81
Index
Symbols Commissioning check (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
#blank# (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202, 203 Communication (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Communication interface protocol (Parameter) . . . . 232
0…9 Communication interface protocol variant
0 % value (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209, 217, 245 (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
100 % value (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209, 218, 245 Communication status (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Compatibility mode (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
A Configuration (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . 233, 236, 240, 243
Access status tooling (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Contact type (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Accessories Contrast display (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Communication specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Covered tank (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Service specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 CTSh (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Actual diagnostics (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 CTSh correction value (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Administration (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 CTSh mode (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Advanced setup (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Current output 1 simulation (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . 328
Air density (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177, 261 Current output 2 simulation (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . 328
Air temperature (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174, 259 Current span (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Air temperature source (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Alarm (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 D
Alarm 1 input source (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Damping factor (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . 211, 221, 291
Alarm 2 input source (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Date / time (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Alarm hysteresis (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Date/time (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314, 322
Alarm mode (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Day (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Alarm value (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 DD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Alarm value source (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Deactivate SIL/WHG (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Ambient pressure (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Decimal places 1 (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Analog I/O (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Analog input 0% value (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Define access code (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Analog input 100% value (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Deformation factor (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Analog input source (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Density (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176, 261
Analog IP (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Density measurement mode (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . 302
Any error (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Density unit (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Density value (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Residual risk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Designated use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Application (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Device alarm simulation (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Assign PV (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Device check (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Assign QV (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Device Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Assign SV (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Device ID (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Assign TV (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Device information (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Device name (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201, 325
B Device replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Backlight (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Device reset (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Balance flag (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Device tag (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . 184, 201, 251, 324
Baudrate (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233, 240 Diagnostic event simulation (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . 327
Bottom level (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Diagnostic events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Bottom level timestamp (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Diagnostic information
Bus termination (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 FieldCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Diagnostic list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
C Diagnostic list (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Calibration (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Diagnostic message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Calibration status (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . 194, 196, 198 Diagnostics
Calibration temperature (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
CE mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Diagnostics (Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Cleaning Diagnostics 1 to 5 (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Exterior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Diagnostics event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Clear alarm (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Digital input mapping (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Commissioning check (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
332 Endress+Hauser
Proservo NMS81 Index
Digital input source (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 G

Digital input source 1 (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Gauge command (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167, 186
Digital input source 2 (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Gauge command 0 (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Digital Xx-x (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Gauge command 1 (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
DIP switch Gauge command 2 (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
see Write protection switch Gauge command 3 (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Discrete 1 selector (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Gauge current (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Displacer (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Gauge status (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Displacer balance volume (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . 297 GP 1 name (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Displacer diameter (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 GP Value 1 (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Displacer height (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 GP Value 2 (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Displacer position (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 GP Value 3 (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Displacer type (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 GP Value 4 (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Displacer volume (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 GP values (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Displacer weight (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Display (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 H
Display damping (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 H alarm (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Display interval (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 H alarm value (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Hardware write protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Distance (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . 168, 174, 189, 191 HART date code (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Distance unit (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 HART descriptor (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Document HART Device(s) (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 HART devices (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Document function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 HART message (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Drum calibration (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 HART output (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Drum calibration (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 HART short tag (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Drum circumference (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Header (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Drum table point (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Header text (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
HH alarm (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
E HH alarm value (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Element position (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 HH+H alarm (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Element position 1 to 24 (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . 176 High stop level (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188, 292
Element temperature (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Hour (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Element temperature 1 to 24 (Parameter) . . . . . . . . 175 HTMS (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Empty (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187, 253 HTMS mode (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Endress+Hauser services Hysteresis (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 HyTD (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 HyTD correction value (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Enter access code (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 HyTD mode (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Error event type (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Error value (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217, 285 I
Event level Immersion depth (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Information (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Input value (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210, 217, 225
Event text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Input value % (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Expected SIL/WHG chain (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Input value in mA (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Extended order code 1 (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Input value percent (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Exterior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Input/output (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
F L
Failure mode (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 L alarm (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Firmware CRC (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 L alarm value (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Firmware version (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Language (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Fixed current (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Level (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171, 253
Float swap mode (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Level mapping (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Forget device (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Level source (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188, 253
Forget device (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Line impedance (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Format display (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Linear expansion coefficient (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . 276
Liquid temp source (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . 189, 257
Endress+Hauser 333
Liquid temperature (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . 174, 258 Offset weight (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

LL alarm (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 One-time command status (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . 170
LL alarm value (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Operating elements
LL+L alarm (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Diagnostics message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Local display Operating mode (Parameter) . . . . . . 202, 207, 213, 223
see Diagnostics message Operating time (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
see In alarm condition Operating time from restart (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . 321
Locking status (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Operation (Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Low stop level (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189, 293 Operational safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Lower density (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Order code (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Lower density offset (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Output density (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Lower density timestamp (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Output level (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Lower interface level (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Output out of range (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Lower interface level timestamp (Parameter) . . . . . . 172 Output pressure (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Output simulation (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
M Output temperature (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Output value (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218, 226
Make drum table (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Output values (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Make low table (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Output vapor temperature (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . 205
Manual air temperature (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Overtension weight (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Manual density (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Manual liquid temperature (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . 257 P
Manual profile level (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 P1 (bottom) (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180, 263
Manual vapor temperature (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . 259 P1 (bottom) manual pressure (Parameter) . . . . . . . . 263
Manual water level (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 P1 (bottom) source (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Maximum probe temperature (Parameter) . . . . . . . . 210 P1 absolute / gauge (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Measured level (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 P1 offset (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Measured lower density (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 P1 position (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Measured materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 P3 (top) (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181, 265
Measured middle density (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . 177 P3 (top) manual pressure (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Measured upper density (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 P3 (top) source (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Menu P3 absolute / gauge (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 P3 offset (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 P3 position (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Parity (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Middle density (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Percent of range (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Middle density offset (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Polling address (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Middle Density Timestamp (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . 178 Post gauge command (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Minimum level (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Pressure (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180, 263
Minimum pressure (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Pressure unit (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Minimum probe temperature (Parameter) . . . . . . . . 210 Previous diagnostics (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Minute (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Primary variable (PV) (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Month (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Probe position (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Motor status (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Process condition (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Move displacer (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191, 192 Process value (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208, 220
Move displacer (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Process variable (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209, 219
Move distance (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Product safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Profile average density (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
N Profile density (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180, 302
Net weight (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Profile density 0 to 49 (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
NMT element values (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Profile density interval (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
No. of preambles (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Profile density offset (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Number format (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Profile density offset distance (Parameter) . . . . . . . . 302
Number of devices (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Profile density position 0 to 49 (Parameter) . . . . . . . 180
Profile density timestamp (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . 179
O Profile point (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Observed density (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176, 261 Progress (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Observed density source (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 PV mA selector (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Offset calibration (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 PV source (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
334 Endress+Hauser
Proservo NMS81 Index
Q Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Quaternary variable (QV) (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233, 236, 240, 243
R CTSh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Readback value (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Date / time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Recalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176, 261
Reference calibration (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Device check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Reference calibration (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Device information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Reference position (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Diagnostic list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Remedial measures Digital input mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Calling up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Digital Xx-x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Displacer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Repair concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Replacing a device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Element position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Requirements for personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Element temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Result drum check (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . 330, 331 GP values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 HART Device(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
RTD connection type (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 HART devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
RTD type (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 HART output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
HTMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
S HyTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Safety distance (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Safety instructions Input/output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171, 253
Safety Instructions (XA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 NMT element values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Safety settings (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180, 263
Secondary variable (SV) (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Profile density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180, 302
Sensor calibration (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Safety settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Sensor calibration (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Sensor config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Sensor config (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Separator (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Spot density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Serial number (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 System units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Set date (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Tank calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Set high weight (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Tank configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Set level (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188, 254 Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174, 257
Set low weight (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 V1 input selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Setup (Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Wiredrum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
SIL confirmation (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 WM550 input selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Simulation (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Submersion depth (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Simulation distance (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 System components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Simulation distance on (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 System polling address (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Simulation value (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 System units (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Slow hoist zone (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Software ID (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 T
Span calibration (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Tank calculation (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Span weight (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Tank configuration (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Spot density (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Tank level (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171, 187, 254
Standby level (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Tank Level % (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Starting level (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Tank reference height (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . 187, 254
Status signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136, 139 Tank ullage (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Step X / 11 (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Tank ullage % (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Stilling well (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Temperature (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174, 257
Submenu Temperature unit (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Tertiary variable (TV) (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Advanced setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Timestamp (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320, 321, 323
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Trouble shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Analog I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Analog IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 U
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Undertension weight (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Endress+Hauser 335
Units preset (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184, 311

Upper density (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Upper density offset (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Upper density timestamp (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Upper interface level (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Upper interface level timestamp (Parameter) . . . . . . 172
Used for SIL/WHG (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . 221, 227
V
V1 address (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236, 237
V1 input selector (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Value 1 display (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Value percent selector (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Vapor density (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176, 262
Vapor temp source (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Vapor temperature (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . 175, 260
W
Water density (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Water level (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173, 255
Water level source (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Weight and measures configuration CRC (Parameter)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Wire expansion coefficient (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . 277
Wire weight (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Wiredrum (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Wizard
Commissioning check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Deactivate SIL/WHG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Drum calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Forget device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Move displacer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Reference calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Sensor calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
SIL confirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
WM550 address (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
WM550 input selector (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Workplace safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Write protection
Via write protection switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Write protection switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Y
Year (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Z
Zero calibration (Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
336 Endress+Hauser
*71486422*
71486422
www.addresses.endress.com

Operating Instruction NMS

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operating Instruction NMS

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operating Instruction NMS

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BA01459G/00/EN/05.

20 Products Solutions Services

Order code: XXXXX-XXXXXX

1 About this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 9 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

11 Diagnostics and troubleshooting . . 134

1 About this document

1.1 Document function

1.2 Document conventions

1.2.1 Safety symbols

1.2.2 Electrical symbols

Direct current and alternating current

1.2.3 Tool symbols

Phillips head screwdriver

Flat blade screwdriver

1.2.4 Symbols for certain types of information and graphics

Notice or individual step to be observed

Operation via operating tool

1.3.1 Technical Information (TI)

1.3.2 Brief Operating Instructions (KA)

1.3.3 Operating Instructions (BA)

1.3.4 Description of Device Parameters (GP)

1.3.5 Safety Instructions (XA)

1.3.6 Installation instructions (EA)

1.4 Registered trademarks

2 Basic safety instructions

2.1 Requirements for the personnel

2.2 Designated use

2.3 Workplace safety

2.4 Operational safety

2.5 Product safety

3.1 Product design

1 Design of Proservo NMS81

4 Incoming acceptance and product

4.1 Incoming acceptance

4.2 Product identification

4 Nameplate Proservo NMS8x for TIIS

4.2.2 Manufacturer address

4.3 Storage and transport

4.3.1 Storage conditions

5.1.1 Type of tanks

Fixed roof tank

Floating roof tank

Covered floating roof tank

Pressurized or bullet tank

Tank with agitator or heavy

Typical tank installation

5 Typical tank installation

5.1.2 Displacer selection guide

30 mm (1.18 in) 50 mm (1.97 in) 70 mm (2.76 in) 110 mm (4.33 in)

316L/PTFE 316L/Alloy C/PTFE 316L 316L

A ⌀30 mm (1.18 in) 316L cylindrical displacer

⌀30 mm (1.18 in) 316L ⌀30 mm (1.18 in) PTFE

Weight (g) 261 250

Volume (ml) 84.3 118

Balance volume (ml) 41.7 59

A ⌀50 mm (1.97 in) 316L cylindrical displacer

Weight (g) 253 253 250

Volume (ml) 143 143 118

Balance volume (ml) 70.7 70.7 59

A ⌀70 mm (2.76 in) 316L conical displacer